(2022) - Michael P. Twohig, Michael E. Levin, Clarissa W. Ong - ACT in Steps - A Transdiagnostic Manual For Learning Acceptance and Commitment Therapy

i
Advance praise for ACT in Steps
“This manual targets a central challenge of ACT—how to move from learning

about the therapy to actually doing it—and hits its mark. It is accessible and con-
cise, offering a session-by-session guide through the therapy from beginning
to end, including initial evaluation, ongoing assessment, and between-session
homework. The authors provide just the right balance of explanation and prac-
tical how-to’s needed to set ACT novices on a solid path to competency. In short,
it is a perfect answer to, “But, how do I actually do the therapy?” For anyone inter-
ested in learning to do ACT—here is your guide.”
—Darrah Westrup, PhD, author of Advanced ACT:
An Experienced Practitioner’s Guide to Optimizing
Delivery, co-author of ACT for the Treatment of Post-Traumatic
Stress Disorder & Trauma-related problems, The Mindful Couple,
and Learning ACT for Group Treatment
“Wow! What a useful and clear guide to starting out in ACT! I wish I’d had this
book when I was an ACT newbie—would have saved me so much anxiety, con-
fusion, and self-doubt. (And it also would have saved my clients from so many of
the common beginners’ mistakes I repeatedly made!) Full of wisdom and packed
with practical strategies, I can highly recommend this book for any therapist or
counselor who’s early on in their ACT journey.”
—Russ Harris, author of The Happiness Trap
“The authors are right: I have always said that the best way to begin actually doing
ACT (after experiential contact with it and exposure to its principles) is to follow
a step-by-step manual with several cases. That ensures you will practice all aspects
of the approach and it distills the learning process down to smaller bits that are
easier to handle. There are other beginning ACT manuals out there but this may
now be my favorite. Thorough and yet simple, this well-written and wise volume
gently pushes you forward to learn ACT, one step at a time. Highly recommended.”
—Steven C. Hayes, Foundation Professor of Psychology,
University of Nevada, Reno, Originator and co-developer
of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy
ii
iii
ACT in Steps
A Transdiagnostic Manual for Learning
Acceptance and Commitment Therapy
M I C H A E L P. T W O H I G , M I C H A E L E . L E V I N ,
A N D C L A R I S S A W. O N G
1
iv
1
Oxford University Press is a department of the University of Oxford. It furthers
the University’s objective of excellence in research, scholarship, and education
by publishing worldwide. Oxford is a registered trade mark of Oxford University
Press in the UK and certain other countries.
Published in the United States of America by Oxford University Press

198 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 10016, United States of America.
© Oxford University Press 2021
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in

a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, without the
prior permission in writing of Oxford University Press, or as expressly permitted
by law, by license, or under terms agreed with the appropriate reproduction
rights organization. Inquiries concerning reproduction outside the scope of the
above should be sent to the Rights Department, Oxford University Press, at the
address above.
You must not circulate this work in any other form

and you must impose this same condition on any acquirer.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Names: Twohig, Michael P., author. | Levin, Michael E., author. | Ong, Clarissa W., author.
Title: ACT in steps : a transdiagnostic manual for learning acceptance and
commitment therapy /Michael P. Twohig, Michael E. Levin, Clarissa W. Ong.
Other titles: Acceptance and commitment therapy in steps
Description: New York : Oxford University Press, [2021] |
Includes bibliographical references and index.
Identifiers: LCCN 2020010447 (print) | LCCN 2020010448 (ebook) |
ISBN 9780190629922 (paperback) | ISBN 9780190668990 (epub) |
ISBN 9780190629946
Subjects: LCSH: Acceptance and commitment therapy. | Psychotherapy.
Classification: LCC RC489.A32 T96 2021 (print) | LCC RC489.A32 (ebook) |
DDC 616.89/1425—dc23
LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2020010447
LC ebook record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2020010448
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Printed by Marquis, Canada
v
CONTENTS
Prologue vii
1. What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)? 1

2. Assessment 19
3. General Guide to the ACT Therapeutic Context 33
4. Session 1: ACT Orientation and Creative Hopelessness 47
Session 1 Homework 59
5. Session 2: Control as the Problem 61
6. Sessions 3 and 4: Acceptance Supported by Defusion 77
7. Sessions 5 and 6: Acceptance, Defusion, Mindfulness, and Values 93
8. Sessions 7 and 8: Acceptance, Defusion, Mindfulness, and
Self-as-Context 109
9. Session 9: Values 119
10. Session 10: Values and Behavioral Commitments 133
11. Session 11: Maintaining Growth 141
Appendix A. General ACT Principles 149

Appendix B. Session-by-Session ACT Cheat Sheet 151
Appendix C. Behavioral Commitment Worksheet 155
Appendix D. List of Mindfulness Apps 157
Appendix E. NOTE Handout 159
Appendix F. Valued Living Questionnaire (VLQ) 161
Appendix G. Bull’s-Eye Values Survey (BEVS) 165
Appendix H. Self-Guided ACT Resources 169
About the Authors 173
Index 175
vi
vi
PROLOGUE
The idea for this book came to me at the end of a workshop I (M.P.T.) was
delivering in Augusta, Georgia, to a group of Army psychologists and other
mental health professionals who work at the Veterans Administration. This was
a training event where someone higher up invited me and the audience was in-
formed that they were required to attend the training. These are always interesting
situations because the curiosity in the topic varies among the audience members.
Some are really pleased that training on ACT is being offered, whereas others have
never heard of ACT before or are not interested in it. In general, these audience
members in Augusta were skeptically open; they were hopeful that the training
would be useful to them and the people they serve, but they were not going to
simply buy into whatever I was saying.
The two days went quite well. We talked about working with posttraumatic
stress disorder (PTSD), wounded warriors, chronic pain, depression, substance
abuse, and many other topics. I taught the audience about philosophy of science,
the theory of ACT, its basic and applied research, and when to use ACT and when
not to. Most of our time was spent on how to implement ACT. As anyone who has
attended a training—even a multi-day one—knows, you are not going to be good
at that therapy (or whatever the training is on) after one event. I knew this from
my own postgraduate training where I experienced the same thing, but something
one of the audience members said really stuck with me. I remember this postdoc-
toral intern vividly. I still know where he was sitting, what he looked like, and the
type of clients with whom he worked. His words stuck with me because it was in
that moment I knew there was a gap in our ACT training. I had just completed a
two-day training on ACT. We did lots of role-plays. I demonstrated everything. At
the end of all this he asked me, “How do I go and do this with my clients?”
I felt disheartened. I worked hard for two days to teach these professionals how
to do ACT. They spent money and time on the workshop, yet the intern did not
know where to start, much less how to conduct multiple sessions of ACT. The
attendees knew many important things about ACT. They could identify the six
important treatment processes in clients. They even knew ways to build the target
vi
viii Prologue
processes. Still, the intern did not know what to say in session one and how to
logically build on that.
Even as the trainer of that workshop and many others, I have to agree with him.
I have never been able to walk out of a training and do the thing that was taught.
I usually learned that the topic was interesting, I liked it, and I was interested in it,
but not how to go and do it. This training gap is exacerbated by the fact that the
instructor leaves after the training. This intern was left on his own. He stayed in
Georgia while I flew back to Utah. I felt frustrated because I get a question like this
at almost every training I give. Maybe other trainers are more talented than me
and their attendees can implement the therapy after their workshops. However, if
this is not the case, then there are many people who have learned enough about
ACT to have an interest in it but lack the resources to actually implement it. I tell
attendees the same thing:
ACT is a therapeutic model that orients to a set of key processes to work

on with clients, rather than a protocol with prescribed techniques, so there
is no manual. There are six processes of change that you should assess for
in your client. Then, you assess the degree to which those processes are af-
fecting the treatment target. You should use any variety of ACT techniques
to influence the pertinent processes of change. As those processes shift in
the desired direction, you should see improvements in the treatment target.
There are books that describe ACT for different clinical presentations which
should offer some guidance. The issue is: with the exception of a few books,
ACT is explained by each process, rather than by session. This is great in
every way except for learning how to do it. There are a couple self-help books
that explain it session-by-session. Maybe reading those will help you un-
derstand what ACT looks like in real life. There are also videos, but they are
really expensive. You can find a few online. Also, join ACBS (Association for
Contextual Behavioral Science) because there is lots of good material there
and their membership fee is quite low.
This is an odd thing to say to someone after they spend two days getting
trained! I am basically saying, “If you want to start doing ACT, you are going to
need to start studying.” Everything is available, but you are going to need to make
sense of it. Mike Levin and I went to graduate school at the University of Nevada,
under the supervision of Steven Hayes, who is primarily associated with the de-
velopment of ACT. Guess how we learned to do ACT? We followed a manual!
I followed a manual on ACT for about two years before I slowly started to un-
derstand what was going on in ACT. My actions were shaped by the client and
my supervisors. I got better at seeing the six processes of change and thinking
about what needed to be targeted next. I started saying things that were not in the
manual but from books, videos, or what I learned from my colleagues. The flow
of sessions got smoother. I started doing ACT. Now, I teach a graduate course on
ix
Prologueix
ACT and supervise a practicum on ACT. Newer therapists follow manuals or self-
help books as they get going.
All this is a long-winded way of saying: We think it is just fine—even wise—
to start doing ACT by following a manual. Somehow your interest was piqued.
Maybe you attended a training on ACT, you read an article or two, or this book
was assigned to you in a graduate course. Nonetheless, you are going to start using
this approach with your clients. We hope that this book will be a useful guide
through your first five or so clients. You will learn how ACT works, when the key
processes of change are present, how to move those processes, and when the ses-
sion feels meaningful, among other things. You will start to see what you do and
do not know, and you can find ways to improve those skills. This book is your
stabilizer—your training wheels—to get you started. This book is hopefully more
useful than a manual because it is written for a novice learning how to do ACT.
We hope it is also more useful than following a self-help book because it is written
for a therapist, not a client. We hope this book is what you need for the beginning
before you move on to more advanced material. Good luck!
x
1
What Is Acceptance and

Commitment Therapy (ACT)?
We will give a broad overview of ACT in this first chapter. This will include how
ACT fits into the broader empirically supported therapy and evidence-based prac-
tice literature, such as how ACT overlaps with other treatments and defining qual-
ities that distinguish it. We will also give you a primer on the basics of ACT theory,
providing you with an overall sense of the model. By the end of the chapter, we
want you to have a sense of what ACT is and of the basic concepts and terms used
throughout this book.
IS THIS A REASONABLE CHOICE FO R THERAPY?
There are many factors that go into choosing a therapy for a given client and as
part of your broader collection of approaches you will use. You might consider
what the evidence base is for the specific presenting concern, whether it fits well
with your existing training and approach to working with clients, and whether it
applies well to the clients you serve. Part of our enthusiasm for ACT is due to how
well it can fit for so many therapists as (1) an empirically supported treatment
that (2) applies to a wide range of clients with various struggles and (3) is flexible
in how it fits a variety of therapeutic approaches and backgrounds. There is also a
style to ACT that fits quite well for certain clients. Understanding how to do ACT
well and when to use it should help you professionally.
ACT is an empirically supported treatment (EST)
Over the past two decades, research on ACT has skyrocketed, with over 300
published randomized control trials (RCTs) to date demonstrating the efficacy of
ACT for a range of problems including depression, anxiety disorders, obsessive-
compulsive and related disorders, psychosis, addictions, eating disorders, stigma,
2
2 A C T in  S teps
stress and burnout, chronic pain, weight loss, and coping with or managing med-
ical conditions (Association for Contextual Behavioral Science [ACBS], 2019).
Meta-analyses of ACT show that it produces large effect sizes when compared
to waitlists, and small to medium effect sizes relative to active control conditions
such as treatment-as-usual (A-Tjak et al., 2015; Bluett, Homan, Morrison, Levin,
& Twohig, 2014; Hughes, Clark, Colclough, Dale, & McMillan, 2017; Lee, An,
Levin, & Twohig, 2015). Compared to other empirically supported cognitive-
behavioral therapies (CBTs), ACT generally performs equivalently (Bluett et al.,
2014), with a slight, nonsignificant trend suggesting ACT may have stronger
effects than other CBTs and established treatments in some cases (A-Tjak et al.,
2015; Lee et al., 2015). As of 2019, the official list of ESTs from Division 12 of the
American Psychological Association indicated that ACT is evidence-based for
anxiety disorders, depression, chronic pain, psychosis, and obsessive-compulsive
disorder (although this list is slow and conservative to update). Thus, the evidence
base of ACT is positive, continues to grow exponentially, and is consistent with
evidence-based practice.
Broad applicability to clients
As you will find throughout this book, ACT is defined functionally in terms of a
set of mindfulness, acceptance, and values-based processes applied to target mal-
adaptive ways in which clients “get stuck” in their lives. The ways clients get stuck
can be found across a wide range of presentations and settings, and the ways we
help clients get unstuck in ACT similarly work well across a breadth of areas.
Just like a client might get stuck in an avoidance cycle with their depression, they
can get stuck with cravings, anxiety, pain, body image concerns, adhering to a
medication, and so on. The evidence bears this out too showing these maladap-
tive processes (e.g., emotional avoidance, inaction, rumination) targeted by ACT
predict a wide range of problems, and using ACT to target these processes leads
to improvements in a variety of clinical presentations (A-Tjak et al., 2015; Bluett
et al., 2014; Hayes, Levin, Plumb-Vilardaga, Villatte, & Pistorello, 2013; Twohig
& Levin, 2017). In later chapters, we will explore how to assess and conceptualize
cases based on the ACT model, but suffice it to say, ACT can be applied to a range
of clients and is thus likely to be useful in whatever setting you work in.
ACT is flexible in applying to a wide range of practitioners
As a functional approach, ACT not only applies to a wide range of clients but
also fits a wide range of practitioners. There are many ways to do ACT, such
that it can align with different personal styles, therapeutic strategies, settings,
and clients. What matters is function—helping clients be more mindful and
accepting of their experiences while doing what is meaningful and effective in
the moment. This can look deeply experiential and relational, psychoeducational
3
What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?3
and didactic, and anywhere in between depending on various factors. Therapists

regularly tell us how they use their existing skills and strategies from other
treatments to do ACT (e.g., psychodynamic, humanistic, cognitive-behavioral,
systems, multicultural) or that they recognize techniques used in ACT protocols
from other approaches. What matters is that your therapist behaviors serve to
move ACT targets (which we often refer to as “function over form”). This flex-
ibility, at times, can feel overwhelming given all the choices available, but the
flexibility also means it is a lot more likely that ACT can be fitted to the type of
therapy you practice and clients with whom you work. If you are in a primary
care setting, rest assured, ACT can be adapted to that type of brief, focused
format. If you are in community mental health, ACT can be adapted to the
unique needs of clients from various backgrounds. As a reflection of this flex-
ibility, ACT is increasingly being adopted by professions across and outside of
healthcare, including behavior analysis, social work, nursing, education, crim-
inal justice, athletics, workplaces, and so on.
This book aims to give an introduction to ACT as an evidence-based, flexible
treatment that can be applied in a variety of ways with a breadth of clients by pro-
viding a general but structured protocol. This will give you a jumping-off point to
learn how to do ACT, developing competencies and strategies that you can con-
tinue to adapt and flexibly apply, based on your understanding of ACT, clinical
style, setting, and clients. Before we go into how to do ACT, we will define what
ACT is within the broader evidence-based therapy field. In a sense, this founda-
tion of what ACT is will help you grasp how the engine of ACT works, so when
potential issues arise (e.g., how to respond when a client does X), you will have
the prerequisite knowledge to steer your therapy session effectively while staying
consistent with the ACT model.
ACT IS PAR T OF THE CBT TRADITION
ACT is a modern form of CBT. Readers may be familiar with debates in the
early 2000s regarding how ACT overlaps, versus is distinct from, other existing
CBT approaches (e.g., Hayes, 2004; Hayes et al., 2013; Hofmann & Asmundson,
2008). Part of this grew out of attempts to define a “third wave” of modern CBTs
that included ACT among other newer CBTs that incorporated mindfulness and
acceptance procedures, often with a behavior analytic foundation (e.g., dialec-
tical behavior therapy, functional analytic psychotherapy, modern forms of be-
havioral activation; Hayes, 2004). This led some to question whether treatments
like ACT represented something new and different within CBT and how it was
situated within the broader field. However, as of 2020, these discussions are
largely historical and the relation between ACT and traditional CBT has been
partially clarified.
In broad strokes, ACT can be understood as being part of the CBT tradition
that includes an integration of behavior therapy and its underlying basic behav-
ioral science (i.e., respondent and operant conditioning) with modern scientific
4
accounts that further address the role of internal processes such as cognitions and
emotions. Like other forms of CBT, ACT recognizes that an adequate approach
to treating clients has to include an account that not only leverages what we know
about human behavior and how to influence it but also addresses the complex
interplay of cognitions, emotions, and other internal factors that influence our
actions and experiences.
ACT also overlaps with defining aspects of CBT, including imposing general
parameters for treatment that give it structure amidst flexibility in its applica-
tion. These parameters include (1) focusing treatment on collaboratively devel-
oped clinical targets and goals within a sensitive time period (i.e., treatment is
time-limited and appropriate to clinical needs), (2) being guided by ongoing as-
sessment and tracking of client functioning, and (3) being driven by a case con-
ceptualization that is continually updated. ACT differs from other CBTs in terms
of the degree of rigid adherence to protocols that are necessary and sufficient
for defining a treatment (i.e., fidelity to protocols). However, as this book shows,
ACT can be implemented with a protocol that includes parameters around the
number, focus, and content of sessions. ACT is just more flexible in terms of
the degree to which a protocol is needed and the degree of flexibility within a
protocol.
That said, ACT also differs from other forms of CBT as it has traditionally been
practiced and taught. Most often, these differences between ACT and traditional
CBT are discussed in terms of how ACT conceptualizes and addresses clients’
internal experiences (Hayes, 2004). For example, some forms of CBT might seek
to reduce and replace anxious thoughts that lead to avoiding feared situations so
a client can approach these situations because the thoughts have changed (i.e.,
changing thoughts to change actions). In contrast, ACT would seek to reduce
the effect of anxious thoughts on one’s behavior so that feared situations are
approached despite having these thoughts (i.e., reducing the impact of thoughts
on actions). Before we go into how these differences affect clinical approach, it is
worth exploring the deeper philosophical differences between traditional CBT
and ACT in how human behavior is studied, conceptualized, and addressed
(Hayes et al., 2013).
FUNCTIONAL CONTEXTUALISM AS THE FOUNDATION

FOR ACT
ACT is based on a philosophy of science called “functional contextualism” (Hayes,

Hayes, & Reese, 1988), which provides the foundation for how we develop and or-
ganize our knowledge about human behavior. Although this can feel esoteric at
times, by the time you finish this section, we hope we will have made a good case
for why this understanding matters and how it can be useful to your learning
ACT. These functional contextual assumptions provide the building blocks for the
treatment strategies you will learn throughout this book.
5
Behavior-in-context as the unit of analysis
A defining feature of functional contextualism is its focus on understanding be-

havior in context. If we think of behavior as anything a person does (including
thoughts, feelings, and other events we cannot see), context refers to everything
else external to that in terms of situation (time, location, other people’s reaction,
etc.) and history (what has happened in the past before and after the given beha-
vior). From a functional contextual perspective, we can only understand a given
action if we include context. For example, the thought “I’m worthless” cannot be
removed and studied in isolation. We have to understand it by looking at when
the thought comes up, what the person’s history with the thought is, and what
happens after the thought occurs.
This might still feel like intellectual jargon, but it echoes down into how thoughts
are treated in ACT. There are not rational thoughts that are healthy and irrational
thoughts that need to be changed to support healthy functioning. Rather, these
are all just behaviors occurring in specific contexts. Someone might have the
thought “I’m worthless” after waving at another person who does not reciprocate.
This person might have a rich history of believing and treating this thought as
factually true, as well as a history of important loved ones telling them they are
“worthless.” This history might lead to withdrawing from others out of shame for
being truly “worthless,” which in the past has led to successfully escaping these
feelings of shame for a brief period of time. From a functional contextual perspec-
tive, there is a lot to “I’m worthless” that has to do with these contextual factors
(i.e., what happens around this thought currently and in the past). These contex-
tual factors help us understand how “I’m worthless” functions and how we might
change these behaviors to support healthier functioning. For example, we could
try to reduce the frequency of the thought by targeting the contexts in which it
occurs (e.g., avoiding awkward hand waves, only waving at people they know can
see them), change the content of the thought by teaching other ways of thinking
in those situations (e.g., identifying other reasons someone might not wave back),
or change the function of the thought by changing how one relates to it (e.g.,
noticing it as just a thought). At its core, the idea is that we do not fully understand
any given behavior (including inner experiences like thoughts and feelings) until
we know the current and historical context.
Prediction and influence is the goal
This leads to the second key feature of functional contextualism: its emphasis on
not only predicting but also influencing (i.e., changing) behavior. We can only say
we understand a behavior if we can both predict and influence it.
Often in psychology we focus on building strong predictive models that rep-
resent the world as it “truly is” in an effort to understand human behavior. For
6
example, we might try to build a model that identifies the mechanisms that
predict depressive episodes (i.e., what causes depression). This might have a
pragmatic goal underneath it, such as “if we really understand what causes de-
pression, then we can treat and prevent depression.” But the whole approach is
about prediction with an assumption that the ability to influence depression will
naturally follow.
What is cool about functional contextualism is the idea that we might ap-
proach the whole enterprise of understanding human behavior and building
up to applied theories with a deep commitment to changing behavior, not just
predicting it. The goal is not to model a world as it truly is, but to model a world
that gives us the ability to predict and influence behavior reliably. Sometimes
those models overlap, but not always. Instead, theoretical concepts and princi-
ples ultimately are treated simply as “ways of speaking” that aim to carve up the
world in whatever ways aid prediction and influence. An analysis is true insofar
as it is useful in telling us how to predict when the behavior will occur and in-
fluence the behavior. This allows us to build and discard concepts on the basis
of how well they serve these goals—not haphazardly, but in a rigorous way of
knowledge building.
For example, the flexible functional approach to ACT is deeply rooted in
a pragmatic approach to understanding behavior—whatever works to pre-
dict and influence behavior. There is no “right” way to do ACT. Instead, ACT
orients to a set of therapeutic processes that reliably predict and influence
behavior, and whatever works to move those processes is functionally doing
ACT. Similarly, we encourage you to focus on workability with your clients;
there is no right or wrong way to live their lives, but we can help them identify
what is not working and find what works well, based on what they want for
themselves.
Successful working is the goal
This brings in another interesting aspect of functional contextualism, which is

the need to state the goal we are working toward so we can evaluate success. In
science, we use prediction and influence, but with clients we need more preci-
sion in terms of what they are working for. In this way, the values work in ACT
really echoes from these functional contextual roots in terms of identifying the
criterion for what works with the client and using that as a touchstone to figure
out how well things are going in therapy. If a given ACT strategy does not help
a client move toward what matters to them, then it does not work and should be
discarded to try something new. This is part of what we really like about ACT
and what makes us passionate to teach it to others. Ultimately, it puts the client
in the driver’s seat to find and build on what is going to work to live a mean-
ingful life in line with what deeply matters to them.
7
THE BEHAVIOR ANALYTIC AND COG NITIVE

ROOTS OF ACT
ACT is rooted within behavior analysis, and in many ways functional contextu-
alism simply explicates the underlying assumptions and philosophy of at least a
primary wing of behavior analysis (Hayes et al., 1988). ACT uses behavior analytic
principles and methods, which provide basic analytic units for understanding
reliable relations between context and behavior that can be used to predict and
influence behavior. This again is reflected in ACT, with an emphasis on under-
standing behavior in context for assessment, case conceptualization, and interven-
tion. Many of the ACT concepts and methods you will learn are direct or indirect
reflections of traditional behavior analysis and its extensions into clinical work.
That said, ACT diverges from traditional behavior analysis in an important
area that is also reflected in the divergence that was found when CBT emerged
from traditional behavior therapy. During the 1970s, therapists were increasingly
becoming disillusioned with the limitations of traditional (first-wave) behavior
therapy for problems clients routinely presented with and were embracing cog-
nitive therapy approaches pioneered by leaders such as Aaron Beck, Albert Ellis,
and Jack Rachman, which influenced CBT as we know it today. Although behavior
analysis included a progressive scientific account of internal experiences including
cognitions, pioneered by B. F. Skinner, this behavior analytic account was limited
when extended to more complex human phenomena typically encountered in
therapeutic work. Thus, just like cognitive therapists who shifted from behavior
therapy to CBT because they needed a more comprehensive account of cogni-
tion, early ACT development led by Steven Hayes faced a challenge in addressing
cognition with the available behavior analytic tools (Zettle, 2005). This led to the
development of relational frame theory (RFT; Hayes, Barnes-Holmes, & Roche,
2001), a modern behavior analytic account of cognition that informs approaches
like ACT to address the complexities of behavior enacted by verbal animals.
Thus, in some ways, ACT ended up in a similar place as traditional CBT, with
a melding of a traditional behavioral approach with more modern accounts of
cognition. But the pathway ACT took was different and resulted in a quite distinct
foundation and set of analytic tools—defined by functional contextualism and
RFT (Hayes et al, 2013).
We will take a moment here to explain RFT a bit to show how this distinct be-
havior analytic account of cognition has substantial implications for how clinical
problems are conceptualized and treated in ACT. The core of RFT is that verbal
humans have the ability to relate things to each other—even relations that are not
immediately obvious and that have never been learned before—and these rela-
tions can alter how these things function or the effect they have on individuals. By
“relations” we mean all the ways we might describe how one stimulus is similar to,
different from, bigger or smaller than, a part of, contingent on, or otherwise associ-
ated with another stimulus. These relations are the “glue” that hold together many
complex ideas and rules for behavior that can be adaptive or maladaptive (e.g.,
8
“Having one drink is a relapse, and if I relapse then I’m a failure, and if I failed,
I might as well keep drinking.”). What makes RFT so innovative and important for
ACT is that these ways of relating things have unique features, including (1) we
have the ability to derive new relations that have never been learned; (2) coher-
ence (making sense) functions as a reinforcer; (3) changes in functions can occur
through derived relations; and (4) these relations and changes in functions are all
controlled by context.
The ability to derive new relations
Humans have a unique capacity to relate things in new ways they have never
learned before and that may not be immediately obvious. For example, try this
right now. How is a toaster similar or different from a dog? It might take a minute
because there are no immediate relations you have learned or that are obvious.
But given enough time, you could probably derive a relation between the two—
they both are essential parts of any good household, they both eat bread if given
the chance, one should be on the counter and the other should not, one runs on
electricity and the other on treats and love, and so on.
We know from a long series of carefully controlled studies that humans have
the ability to derive relations that have never been taught (Hayes et al., 2001). This
can work well in some situations, like if you had to figure out how to escape from
a dangerous situation you have never been in. Yet, it can also create challenges,
like if you thought you had to escape from a situation that is not actually dan-
gerous. Through the process of being able to relate anything to anything else, we
have a fantastic ability to evaluate, plan, create, and problem-solve in ways that
make our species incredibly successful. However, we also have a fantastic ability
to evaluate in unhelpful judgmental ways, to come up with ineffective plans for
events that will never occur, to create new ways of making ourselves and others
miserable, and to problem-solve things that are either not problems or not solv-
able. In any moment, we can relate seemingly trivial, neutral things to incredibly
aversive, upsetting things, thus greatly expanding our capacity for suffering. For
example, we can associate anything with the label “bad,” including our bodies,
feelings, and thoughts, and such associations can be unhelpful if we then respond
to these stimuli accordingly.
Coherence as a reinforcer
The second key feature identified by RFT is that these relations are reinforced by
coherence, meaning we relate things that make sense and seem logical. Again, this
is a useful cognitive process because it is usually adaptive to think logically and
not contradict ourselves. But this also means relating is automatically reinforced
by coherence and thus can continue to elicit and strengthen the ongoing behavior
without conscious attention. Much like how eating each chip in a bag of chips
9
can be automatically reinforcing and lead to the next chip, we can keep “making
sense of things” all day. This might explain the automatic nature and frequency of
thinking. We are constantly relating things to each other, seemingly on autopilot,
and without much ability to control it. We do not relate things based primarily on
what makes us feel good or helps us but rather what makes sense. Consequently,
we can get wrapped up in an ongoing stream of a logical story about how we are
not good enough, will never be loved, should give up, and so on. Again, as this
process is automatic, ACT uses strategies (mindfulness, acceptance) to observe
this process and choose when to be regulated by it.
Changes in function
We might be able to relatively easily manage just these two features of relating
anything to anything else on an almost constant loop based on what “makes
sense,” if not for a third feature. The ways we relate things change how these
things function. If we were constantly evaluating ourselves and thinking about
how we are terrible but it did not change how we felt, acted, or otherwise engaged
in the world, it probably would not be a big deal. But in actuality, how we re-
late (or think about) things affects all these other aspects of our functioning. The
thought “I can’t handle my anxiety” can transform the discomfort of anxiety into
absolute fear as anxiety becomes something dangerous, unmanageable, and to be
avoided at all costs. This can not only intensify an event but also change its overall
meaning. For example, if being at home on a Friday night is related to “nobody
likes me,” then watching a movie and relaxing at home can all of a sudden be a
sad and lonely activity, despite its being an enjoyable event without that thought.
This is all contextually controlled
Although we can relate anything to anything and thereby change our experiences
and reactions to these things, this process is not random. Rather, all these relations
and transformations through relations are governed by context. This is why when
you see the letters bat you do not immediately have all the reactions you would
normally have to seeing a disgusting, flying rodent (apologies to bat lovers) as well
as to playing baseball. Rather, the symbols associated with bat only have meaning
in context, such as your history with these symbols, the collection of symbols
surrounding it, and the context in which you are interacting with this book. We
could say “Get out, there is a fire,” but you probably would not run out the house
right this moment because of the context. However, you might do that if someone
woke you up at 3 a.m. yelling the exact same phrase. Context is extremely impor-
tant in governing how we relate things and how things change as a result. This is
extremely important for ACT as a functional contextual approach because it gives
us a way to reduce maladaptive functions and build up more adaptive ones. For
example, we can shift the important and sad thought “I’m fat” to “funny sound
10
that shows up in my head” using techniques like acceptance and mindfulness. We

can also tie scary or anxiety-provoking events to something meaningful and alter
the functions of those emotions (e.g., approach rather than avoid) using values.
HOW PEOPLE GET STUCK: THE PSYCHOLOGICAL

INFLEXIBILITY MODEL
Overall, this combination of traditional behavior analysis with the additional in-
sight of RFT provides the principles for developing an applied theoretical model
of psychopathology (or a theory for how people get stuck) which we call psy-
chological inflexibility. This model orients to how cognitive processes alter direct
behavioral contingencies to produce excessive suffering and a lack of meaningful,
effective action. Overall, psychological inflexibility refers to rigid patterns of beha-
vior in which actions are excessively guided by internal experiences (e.g., thoughts,
feelings, cravings) rather than direct contingencies (what is effective) and values
(what is meaningful). These are most exemplified by two processes: cognitive fu-
sion and experiential avoidance.
Cognitive fusion describes responding to thoughts in a literal context or as if they
were absolutely true. A fused response to “You’ll never understand ACT” would
be one that treats this as reflecting reality and thus guiding your experiences and
behavior. Maybe you will feel sad or anxious and choose to put this book away,
never to be opened again. In other words, cognitive fusion means thoughts “push
us around” and we do whatever they tell us to do. Similarly, a client who is fused
with the thought “There’s no point in trying” might give up on an important goal
or activity, like quitting smoking, applying for a new job, and so on. Irrespective of
how accurate the thought is, the issue is behavior is dominated by thoughts rather
than other sources of information.
Experiential avoidance refers to rigid attempts to avoid, get rid of, control, or
otherwise change inner experiences (e.g., thoughts, feelings, bodily sensations).
This can take many forms because experiential avoidance is defined by the pur-
pose the behavior is intended to serve (regulate inner experiences), not what the
behavior looks like. Someone might engage in experiential avoidance by drinking,
withdrawing from others, trying to suppress thoughts, cleaning, exercising,
practicing mindfulness, or even seeing a therapist. Essentially, if clients are doing
a certain behavior to try to get away from an unwanted thought, feeling, or other
inner experience, they are engaging in experiential avoidance no matter how
“healthy” the behavior looks.
Interestingly, this means either doing what thoughts tell us to do or focusing
on trying to make thoughts and other inner experiences go away are form of psy-
chological inflexibility that leads to suffering. This makes sense, coming back to
context because, in both cases, thoughts, feelings, and other inner experiences
are being related to in a literal way, either as true rules that must be followed or
as bad, dangerous things that must be avoided. ACT takes the stance that psycho-
logical problems are not due to our inner experiences being bad things that must
1
be changed. Rather, many of our problems may be due to how we relate to our
experiences, and, more specifically, relating to our experiences as bad, maladap-
tive things that must be changed may be part of the problem—not the solution.
ACCEPTANCE AND MINDFULNESS AS A PATHWAY

TO REDUCE THE IMPACT OF INNER EXPERIENCES
Based on the psychological inflexibility model, clients get stuck when their
actions are dominated by their inner experiences and reflect efforts to avoid these
experiences. Thus, a large part of ACT is reducing the functional impact of inner
experiences by changing how we relate or respond to them. This differs from the
default way we typically relate to and try to address inner experiences.
ACT addresses inner experiences through the use of acceptance and
mindfulness-based therapeutic procedures. Rather than changing the content of
inner experiences, the aim of ACT is to change our relationship to these inner
experiences so that they have a weaker impact on behavior. For example, ACT
might teach a client to relate to the thought “Everyone thinks I’m weird” as just
a thought and to make room for the discomfort of approaching social situations
even when difficult thoughts and feelings arise. Rather than inner experiences,
ACT targets engagement in meaningful and effective behaviors while being
mindful and accepting of inner experiences that arise. When we take this stance,
the thought “Everyone thinks I’m weird” does not have to change, because it no
longer affects what we do. That is, we can still go to social gatherings and ask
people out with the thought “Everyone think I’m weird” present because we have
learned to relate to it as just a thought rather than something literally true that
must be acted on, fought with, or otherwise treated as a real thing. We typically
break these methods down into four core components: cognitive defusion, ac-
ceptance, being present, and a flexible sense of self (or self-as-context).
Cognitive defusion is the process of noticing thoughts as just thoughts. It most
directly targets its inverse, cognitive fusion. Going back to RFT, this is all about
changing the context in which we are responding to inner experiences, such as
thoughts. Cognitive defusion helps shift from a literal context where thoughts are
true and have power and meaning to one in which thoughts are noticed as just
thoughts. For example, we might help a client see a thought as just a bunch of
funny symbols on a piece of paper, arbitrary sounds when said out loud, history
of which they can recall past occurrences, as a character from a favorite TV show,
or even an overeager assistant trying to do its best to help out. The idea is to em-
phasize other ways our mind works besides the specific one we typically operate
on, which is the literal content of what a thought is saying.
Acceptance involves being open and welcoming to unwanted thoughts and
feelings and allowing them to be present for what they are without giving into or
trying to make them go away. This most directly targets its inverse, experiential
avoidance. Initially, acceptance might seem to just be the act of not engaging in
experiential avoidance: allowing these inner experiences to come and go without
12
efforts to avoid or change them. However, this would miss the more active ways in
which acceptance is practiced. Acceptance is more than a lack of fighting; it is an
intentional, active, and open stance. That is, we choose to make space for difficult
thoughts and feelings rather than feel resigned to their occurrence. Acceptance is
more akin to graciously receiving a gift from a loved one than to being hit in the
face by an unruly wave.
This is predicated on clients’ recognizing these experiences for what they are,
thereby creating a context in which thoughts and feelings can be treated as natural
reactions instead of things to be avoided or acted on. We emphasize the welcoming
stance in acceptance, partly to avoid misinterpreting acceptance as a “just do it”
stance where clients are supposed to white-knuckle their way through previously
avoided situations while trying to ignore unwanted thoughts and feelings. This
can work for a short period, but you would not be doing something radically dif-
ferent with your inner world, and it typically does not work over time as resources
and motivation for the effort it takes dwindle. Instead, acceptance means an ac-
tive, welcoming, mindful approach to inner experiences.
Being present refers to being attentive to relevant experiences and information
in the moment in a flexible, effective way. An aspect of psychological inflexibility
is the tendency to get stuck with attention rigidly focused on the past or future
(e.g., regrets, worries) or to be overly fixated or hypervigilant toward a limited
set of experiences in the present (e.g., changes in heart rate, potentially disap-
proving expressions from others). The aim of ACT is to help clients attend to
what is happening in the here-and-now so that behavior can be sensitive to and
guided by their current environment—both internal and external. This is another
way of reducing the impact of thoughts and feelings as clients attend to a variety
of sources of information rather than just their inner world. For example, being
present could help a client break out of a mindless eating pattern so they can savor
food they enjoy and notice signals that they are full, rather than continuing to
overeat on autopilot while they think about their stressors.
Flexible sense of self refers to a process in which clients learn to take a perspec-
tive in which the “self ” is more than, distinct from, and the container of their
inner experiences (a process we also sometimes call self-as-context in ACT).
Due to the inherently abstract nature of this process, it is often best understood
through experiential exercises and metaphors. For example, imagine you are the
sky and your thoughts and feelings are the passing clouds and weather. In other
words, you are a stable, broad perspective that can simply observe the passing
inner experiences. Just like how the sky cannot be defined by or threatened by the
weather, you cannot be defined by or threatened by your thoughts and feelings.
This observing self-perspective can help break unhelpful patterns when clients
are overly entangled with a “self-story” about who they are, what they should do,
what is wrong with them, and so on because the “self ” becomes no longer tied
to these narratives. Instead, the “self ” is perceived as a dispassionate, observing
entity through which thoughts and feelings occur. This self-perspective can also
strengthen other acceptance and mindfulness processes. It becomes easier to
13
acknowledge and allow experiences to be present for what they are when we can
see them as a part of ourselves, rather than as who we are.
The combination of cognitive defusion, acceptance, being present, and a flex-
ible sense of self can be conceptualized as the mindfulness components of ACT.
These processes overlap in many ways with conceptualizations of mindfulness as a
way of attending to the present in a nonreactive, accepting way. One of the things
we like about the ACT approach to these mindfulness processes is that it orients
to functional processes that you can engage in various ways with clients outside
of typical mindfulness meditation strategies. For example, you can elicit, model,
and reinforce these processes in conversations with your client. If a client said in
session, “I’m really anxious about this upcoming family party,” a therapist could
give a response supporting defusion (“So your mind is saying this could go really
bad and is giving many thoughts about what might go wrong.”), or acceptance
(“So anxiety is present right now, can we just make space for that to be here?”),
or being present (“What are you noticing right now as this anxiety comes up?”),
or a flexible sense of self (“Imagine you were at the party right now. What other
experiences might you notice passing by like clouds from that ‘sky’ perspective
we discussed?”). Echoing back to the pragmatic goal of whatever works to predict
and influence behavior, these therapeutic processes can orient therapists to mul-
tiple approaches to change client behavior and provide considerable flexibility in
how these goals are achieved.
Although these processes largely have the aim of changing the context in which
we relate to our thoughts and feelings, they ultimately are used to seek to change
what clients do so they are better able to engage in meaningful actions. The goal
is not to notice or accept painful psychological experiences for their own sake;
it is to empower clients to do what matters even when difficult thoughts and
feelings arise. Thus, this work should not end with clients simply doing some-
thing “between their ears” but with changing overt behavior. If these mindfulness
methods work, we should see changes in behavior. As maladaptive effects of inner
experiences on behavior are lessened, clients will have more opportunity to act on
the basis of what would be meaningful or effective in the moment.
VALUES AND COMMITTED ACTION AS A PATHWAY

TO DOING WHAT MATTERS
Again, the ultimate goal of ACT is not to change unwanted inner experiences;
it is to empower clients to live fulfilling lives. That is, the aim of ACT is to help
clients do what matters to them. Thus, lessening the impact of inner experiences
on clients’ actions is done in the service of helping clients identify and engage
in meaningful activities. As unhelpful guides for action are reduced (e.g., cogni-
tive fusion, experiential avoidance), clients often need help figuring out what they
want to be doing and how to actually do it. This is addressed with the values and
committed action components of ACT.
14
Values refers to what is deeply important to clients in terms of how they act
and what their actions stand for. We all have things that are important to us and
that we would work toward. Sometimes we develop these values individually,
and sometimes they are largely culturally based. Regardless of their sources, they
function as reinforcers. One way to clarify this is to consider an ordinary action
like cooking. You can approach cooking in various ways. For example, you could
cook in a way that is creative, fun, connected with other people, giving a sense of
purpose and meaning to the activity. However, you could also cook in a way that
is mindless, rushed, or resentful. Depending on your stance toward the task, your
experience of the same action will likely differ. Thus, actively connecting with
our values in the moment can change how we experience our behaviors, making
them more fulfilling to us. In other words, values are found in how actions are
taken, focusing on the qualities people bring to actions rather than the outcome
(whether the meal is delicious or others like it). This is a cognitive process in that
clients are asked to describe more abstract principles that can guide and motivate
their actions across a range of situations. This is an example of how ACT uses
RFT to clients’ advantage: by using cognitions—or our verbal ability to associate
anything with anything—to increase effective patterns of behavior and reduce un-
helpful effects of cognition on behavior. As you will see in later chapters, ACT uses
various strategies to help clients identify their values and learn how to use these
values to motivate doing what matters to them.
Committed action refers to the doing part of this work, helping clients build
larger and larger patterns of meaningful activity in their lives. In many ways, this
is where the “rubber meets the road” with everything done in ACT as clients prac-
tice acceptance and mindfulness to move toward their values with specific be-
havioral commitments. This might fit in well with other behavior change work
you have done in which you set specific goals with your clients for what they will
do to make meaningful changes and practice what they have learned in therapy.
Committed action includes goal setting and sometimes behavioral methods that
help ensure that clients are successful in following through with their goal (e.g.,
behavioral activation, exposure). Committed action is also where other behav-
ioral methods might be integrated to teach clients how to do new things if there
is a skills deficit (e.g., social skills training). Lastly, we use committed action as a
way to orient to ongoing therapy goals and relapse prevention from an ACT per-
spective focusing on building patterns of valued activity over time and returning
to commitments when clients go off course.
THIS ALL LEADS TO PSYCHOLOGICAL FLEXIBILITY
Altogether, this combination of acceptance, mindfulness, and values- based

processes is referred to as the psychological flexibility model, which is the ACT
model for psychological health and therapeutic change. Thus, psychological flex-
ibility refers to the ability to engage in meaningful actions while being mindful
and accepting of whatever inner experiences arise—in other words, to be able to
15
do what matters while being open and aware to whatever the present moment
affords, including unwanted thoughts and feelings. The hexaflex graphic is com-
monly used to display this model (see Figure 1.1), which highlights how each of
the processes we have discussed are part of psychological flexibility and inter-
connected. For example, being able to notice thoughts as just thoughts (cognitive
defusion) is predicated on attending to thoughts (being present), which can then
help facilitate accepting difficult thoughts (acceptance) and doing what matters
(values, committed actions). Overall, psychological flexibility is the solution to
getting stuck in psychological inflexibility.
This psychological flexibility model provides a guide for how to conceptualize
cases and practice ACT with your clients. For example, some clients may struggle
more with targets on the left side of the hexaflex, by being caught up in thoughts
or being avoidant, while others might struggle more with the right side, by not
knowing what matters to them or not knowing skills deficits in being able to act
effectively. Similarly, you might notice different processes at play in any moment
(e.g., a client being on autopilot and disconnected with values) and points at
Commitment and Behavior

Change Processes
Contact with the

Present Moment
Acceptance Values
Psychological
flexibility
Defusion Committed
Action
Self as
Contest
Mindfulness and
Acceptance
Processes
Figure 1.1 A model of psychological flexibility and its subprocesses.
16
which you will have to choose what process to leverage (e.g., should I lean in on
attending to the present moment or explore their values?).
The psychological flexibility model orients back to where we started in this
chapter: ACT is defined functionally in terms of a set of therapeutic processes
designed to help clients get unstuck from patterns that prevent them from
doing what matters in their lives. Psychological inflexibility can manifest differ-
ently across individuals. Hence, the focus is on the function of behaviors (i.e.,
actions that are overly guided by literal interpretations of thoughts or avoiding
unwanted inner experiences). These functions can underlie a wide range of clin-
ical presentations and problem behaviors with which you might work—wherever
people can get stuck in unhelpful ways of relating to their inner experiences. This
also means ACT can be applied across this breadth of clinical presentations to re-
duce psychological inflexibility by increasing psychological flexibility.
APPLYING THE PSYCHOLOGICAL FLEXIBILITY

MODEL: DOING ACT
A focus on function over form not only expands the variety of clients to whom
ACT can be applied, it also expands the variety of ways a therapist can increase
psychological flexibility. ACT is not defined by any technique or specific form of
behavior on the part of the therapist; what matters is that the therapist has a func-
tional impact on their client that increases psychological flexibility. This means
you can fit ACT to your personal style, skills, and setting, taking your existing
strengths and applying them to the psychological flexibility model.
That said, this can also be a challenge for therapists new to ACT. There are count-
less ways to implement ACT with your clients, and trainings in ACT regularly
focus more on the function and flexibility with which ACT can be implemented.
This can sometimes make it hard for therapists learning ACT to know what to do
in the moment with clients, how to stick to ACT rather than fall back into other
treatments they already know, and how to build on areas in which they have less
competence.
In this book, we will focus on one way to do ACT. That is all it is: one way
among many to use the psychological flexibility model. We hope to provide a set
of stepping stones you can use to begin your journey with learning ACT. You can
follow the protocol in this book for an initial set of cases, using the structure and
scaffolding to learn the basics. As you practice this protocol, you will hopefully
get a better sense of what it looks like to do ACT in the moment, how to identify
the target functions in ACT in session, and some key ACT strategies. We hope
this gives you a basic foundation you can build on and integrate into your ther-
apeutic style and orientation as you continue to explore the exciting and broad
opportunities that ACT provides in working with clients to make meaningful
changes in their lives.
17
REFERENCES
Association for Contextual Behavioral Science. (2020). ACT randomized controlled

trials since 1986. Retrieved from https://contextualscience.org/ACT_Randomized_
Controlled_Trials
A-Tjak, J. G. L., Davis, M. L., Morina, N., Powers, M. B., Smits, J. A. J., & Emmelkamp
P. M. G. (2015). A meta-analysis of the efficacy of acceptance and commitment
therapy for clinically relevant mental and physical health problems. Psychotherapy
and Psychosomatics, 84(30), 30–36.
Bluett, E. J., Homan, K. J., Morrison, K. L., Levin, M. E., & Twohig, M. P. (2014).
Acceptance and commitment therapy for anxiety and OCD spectrum disorders: An
empirical review. Journal of Anxiety Disorders, 6, 612–624.
Hayes, S. C. (2004). Acceptance and commitment therapy, relational frame theory, and
the third wave of behavior therapy. Behavior Therapy, 35, 639–665.
Hayes, S. C., Barnes-Holmes, D., & Roche, B. (Eds.). (2001). Relational frame theory: A
post-Skinnerian account of human language and cognition. Kluwer Academic/
Plenum Publishers.
Hayes, S. C., Hayes, L. J., & Reese, H. W. (1988). Finding the philosophical core: A re-
view of Stephen C. Pepper’s world hypotheses: A study in evidence. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 50, 97.
Hayes, S. C., Levin, M. E., Plumb-Vilardaga, J., Villatte, J. L., & Pistorello, J. (2013).
Acceptance and commitment therapy and contextual behavioral science: Examining
the progress of a distinctive model of behavioral and cognitive therapy. Behavior
Therapy, 44(2), 180–198.
Hofmann, S. G., & Asmundson, G. J. G. (2008). Acceptance and mindfulness-based
therapy: New wave or old hat? Clinical Psychology Review, 28, 1–16.
Hughes, L. S., Clark, J., Colclough, J. A., Dale, E., & McMillan, D. (2017). Acceptance
and commitment therapy (ACT) for chronic pain: A systematic review and meta-
analyses. Clinical Journal of Pain, 33, 552–568.
Lee, E. B., An, W., Levin, M. E., & Twohig, M. P. (2015). An initial meta-analysis of ac-
ceptance and commitment therapy for treating substance use disorders. Drug and
Alcohol Dependence, 155, 1–7.
Twohig, M. P., & Levin M. E. (2017). Acceptance and commitment therapy as a treat-
ment for anxiety and depression: A review. Psychiatric Clinics, 40, 751–770.
Zettle, R. D. (2005). The evolution of a contextual approach to therapy: From compre-
hensive distancing to ACT. International Journal of Behavioral Consultation and
Therapy, 1, 77–89.
18
19
Assessment
ACT is a function-based treatment, which means therapeutic choices depend

on the purpose or meaning that client behaviors serve in context. No thought,
feeling, or bodily sensation is inherently good or bad. To understand these
experiences and behaviors, we have to know more than their form. In ACT, we
look at how that inner experience affects the client and what actions it likely leads
to. Similarly, we look at the meaning behind actions more so than the behaviors
themselves. In ACT, we may target a diagnosable disorder, but at other times
we might heavily focus on growing meaningful patterns of behavior. ACT is
person-centered, and people are unique and complicated. Therefore, you will
need to know your client’s current clinical presentation and life situation in
order to make the best treatment plans. While many areas of assessment need to
occur, we are going to orient you to four basic areas which should prepare you
to implement ACT. Some of what we will discuss provides guidance for general
assessment, and some of it is specific to ACT. The following is not a comprehen-
sive guide for assessment. Instead, we focus on variables that might help you de-
termine if ACT is a good fit for your client, and help you implement ACT more
effectively in subsequent sessions.
FOUR MAIN AREAS OF ASSESSMENT FROM AN

ACT APPROACH
1. Determine the primary clinical concern(s). That is, what is the

client seeking services for?
2. Determine the functional context maintaining the target behaviors.
3. Assess for contextual, historical, or cultural variables that play into the
case presentation.
4. Set up an ongoing assessment program for treatment.
20
1. Determine the primary clinical concern(s)
This statement probably seems obvious to individuals working from an empir-

ically supported treatment-or evidence-based practice approach, because such
interventions largely target specific disorders or clinical issues. Condition-specific
interventions aimed at symptom reduction contrast with treatments focused on a
broader underlying or intrapsychic issue. While ACT targets an underlying pro-
cess that manifests as a clinical issue, its ultimate goal is to create a different be-
havioral pattern by the end of treatment.
Some of your clients will have received therapy or be otherwise well-versed
in psychology and know that therapy tends to focus on a particular set of is-
sues. For instance, someone who is being treated in the Veterans Administration
(VA) system will likely know their diagnoses and even know which ones or what
elements of them they want help with. However, other clients may know very little
about what is occurring for them and be looking for guidance from the therapist.
Personally, we think having an objective treatment target is helpful to the client.
Having a predetermined goal or target allows the client and therapist to judge the
utility of sessions objectively, as it provides a clear metric for success.
As an example, a client may enter therapy because life is difficult and they feel
depressed. After a thorough assessment, you determine that the client meets
criteria for social anxiety disorder and major depressive disorder—with the de-
pression secondary to the anxiety disorder. Additionally, both issues are affecting
the individual’s college education, job satisfaction, as well as romantic and other
social relationships. Finally, all these disorders are occurring in a social and cul-
tural context that makes change difficult (e.g., sexism or racism), along with fi-
nancial limitations and skills deficits with regard to higher education, and so on.
All this information should be shared with the client, and a collaborative decision
about goals should be made.
We suggest targeting the clinical issue that will have the most positive effect on
the client’s life and affect other clinical issues. Often, one clinical issue will affect
other ones; for example, lessening social anxiety will most likely lessen the feeling
of depression. Similarly, if social anxiety is lessened, then school and other social
struggles will likely diminish, which will also affect depression. While this all may
seem obvious to the therapist, this logic should be discussed with the client. One
limitation to this approach is that it parses a whole client into actions or disorders
rather than addressing all the aspects of the client’s life.
While a holistic approach has clear advantages, we see multiple, distinct, pos-
itive features to targeting one particular issue—especially for people learning a
therapy. First, anyone who has done a lot of therapy knows how it can become
about the “problem of the week” unless there is some decent guidance for the ses-
sions. Each week the client may have a new struggle, and the therapist can easily
assist in addressing that issue. A talented ACT therapist could keep coming back
to the six processes of change and how they play into these weekly issues, but ac-
tively building on a solid skill foundation is more difficult, as the situations are
21
Assessment21
different each week. Alternatively, if the client and therapist agree on a particular
issue to work on, every session can focus on that clinical issue. Therefore, the ses-
sions are more structured. This also helps the client to come out of therapy with
gains in at least one area.
Second, studies generally show that targeting one area with ACT will affect
other clinical issues (Morrison et al., 2019; Ong et al., 2019). Personally, we
have seen many clients with whom we targeted a specific diagnosable issue and
observed notable change in that issue throughout treatment. Then, toward the
end of therapy, as positive changes occurred in their main area of concern, clients
started working on other less immediate issues. We see this as partially being the
result of individuals’ dealing with the most pressing issues in life before moving
on to other things. Another element is that they have likely developed psycholog-
ical flexibility—including more values clarity—and are now able to follow those
values more easily and generalize the skills to different life domains.
Third, and maybe most important for the purpose of this book, having one
clear target gives direction to the therapist and client. The therapist can focus on
conceptualizing and addressing the main clinical presentation. The target private
event stays the same throughout treatment, overt and covert avoidance actions
are clearer, and how the client’s actions tie into values remains consistent. This
allows the client and therapist to work from a straightforward conceptualization
throughout treatment rather than shifting the case conceptualization at each ses-
sion. If more sessions are indicated at the end of therapy, the therapist and client
can agree to add more. In our experience, if a client comes in with a concern,
the sessions focus on that concern, and there is some success with it, the client
will happily end therapy. Even though there may be unlimited issues for which
we can see therapists, we generally only do so when these issues reach a notable
level of concern. However, we do not typically seek additional assistance until that
happens.
To summarize, we recommend engaging in a full assessment and determining
all clinical issues that the client is dealing with. Next, we recommend working
with the client to determine what the main clinical issue is and making that the
focus of therapy. After that main clinical issue is lessened, the therapist can check
back on the other ones and see what the client would like to do about them. It is
likely the secondary and tertiary clinical issues will also have decreased such that
the client is no longer concerned with them and will want to end therapy.
2. Determine the functional context maintaining the

target behavior
The issue with assessments based on diagnosis is that they miss the idiographic
elements of each clinical presentation, given there are many ways similar diagnoses
can be initiated or maintained. This is not always detrimental to therapy, because
many manualized treatments are robust enough to handle different functions of
similar presentations. In this segment of assessment, we aim to do three things: (1)
2
AAQ-II
Below you will find a list of statements. Please rate how true each statement is for you by circling a
number next to it. Use the scale below to make your choice.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
never very seldom seldom sometimes frequently almost always always
true true true true true true true
1. My painful experiences and memories make it difficult for me to live a

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
life that i would value.
2. I’m afraid of my feelings. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. I worry about not being able to control my worries and feelings. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4. My painful memories prevent me from having a fulfilling life. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5. Emotions cause problems in my life. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6. It seems like most people are handling their lives better than I am. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7. Worries get in the way of my success. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Figure 2.1 The Acceptance and Action Questionnaire—II. Sum item ratings to obtain a
total scale score. Higher scores indicate more psychological inflexibility.
determine if the clinical presentation is largely the result of psychological inflexi-

bility; (2) if it is, dig deeper into what elements of psychological inflexibility con-
tribute to the clinical issue; and (3) identify other clinical variables that might be a
part of the presentation (e.g., social skills deficit, strained family relations).
It is easy to determine if psychological inflexibility plays a role in the clinical
issue by giving the client the Acceptance and Action Questionnaire–II (AAQ-II;
Bond et al., 2011), a general measure of psychological inflexibility. We have in-
cluded a copy of the AAQ-II here as it is not copyrighted (see Figure 2.1). Scores
range from 7 to 49, with higher scores indicating more psychological inflexibility
(i.e., high is bad, low is good). Generally, a score over 24 is considered to be in
the clinical range, although these cutoffs vary depending on the presentation and
demographic profile of the client. This measure can be slow to move, so there is
no reason to give it more often than every other session. As noted, the AAQ-II is a
general psychological inflexibility measure and specific versions of the AAQ have
been created for particular disorders. The context-specific AAQs generally func-
tion better and are more sensitive to changes as a result of therapy. A list of them
(as of the writing of this book) is provided in Table 2.1. The AAQ will only give
you general data on whether your client struggles with psychological inflexibility;
client-specific assessment materials and questions can help you really learn what
is happening for your client.
If you believe psychological inflexibility is a significant variable in the clinical
presentation, we suggest exploring which aspects of psychological inflexibility are
most relevant. There are a few ways to evaluate client psychological inflexibility.
In our opinion, they are functionally quite similar: They orient you toward the six
23
Assessment23
processes of change as they pertain to your client. One of our favorites, and the
one we use in our graduate program training, is the ACT ADVISOR (see Figure
2.2), which was originally created by David Chantry and openly distributed via the
Web. We like the version provided in this book because it has simple reminders
of what each process is and shows each process on a continuum. It is important
to remember that each of these six processes is functional, which means where
one wants to be on the continuum depends on context. In our clinical work, we
complete this at the beginning of therapy and then every few sessions throughout.
It helps us know which of the six processes of change we should be focusing on.
We assess for each of these processes by quickly interviewing the client at the
beginning of a therapy session or by putting information together from other
conversations. As you get to know your client, it becomes easier to know where
they stand on each of these six processes. Remember, where your clients are with
respect to these processes varies depending on the situation, so you may need to
either find an average of where they are or think in terms of the most pertinent
situations for each of these processes (e.g., work, romantic relationships).
Here are examples of questions you can ask to get a sense of where people are
on the six processes. We will use anxiety as the example to make the questions
clearer, but you can adjust them based on your client’s presenting concern.
Acceptance
How do you usually respond to anxiety when it is there?
Are you OK with feeling anxiety?
Do you generally allow anxiety to be there, or do you push it away?
Defusion
When anxiety shows up, how does it affect you?
Is anxiety easy or difficult to feel?
What are your feelings toward anxiety?
Self-as-context
Does your anxiety define you?
Can you see yourself without anxiety?
How would you define yourself?
Being present
Do you think about the present, past, or future most?
When anxiety shows up, do you pay attention to it or other things
happening around you?
Does your anxiety take you out of the moment?
Values
What are the most important things to you in life?
If anxiety was not in the way, how would you be spending your time?
What do you feel you spend the most time wishing you were doing?
24
Table 2.1 List of Context-Specific Psychological Flexibility Measures
Name Abbreviation Target Area Primary Citation Number of

Items
Acceptance AAQ-ABI Acquired brain Whiting, Deane, 9
and Action injury Ciarrochi, McLeod,
Questionnaire— & Simpson (2015)
Acquired Brain
Injury
Voices Acceptance VAAS Auditory Shawyer et al. 31 (command)
and Action Scale hallucinations (2007) 12 (general)
(command and/or
general)
Voices Acceptance VAAS-9 Auditory Brockman, 9
and Action Scale-9 hallucinations Kiernan, & Murrell
(general) (2015)
Body Image BI-AAQ Body image Sandoz, Wilson, 12
Acceptance (disordered eating Merwin, & Kellum
and Action focus) (2013)
Questionnaire
Body Image BI-AAQ-5 Body image Basarkod, Sahdra, 5
Acceptance (disordered eating & Ciarrochi (2018)
and Action focus)
Questionnaire-5
Body Image BIPIS Body image Callaghan, Sandoz, 16
Psychological (disturbance Darrow, & Feeney
Inflexibility Scale and dysmorphia (2015)
focus)
Cancer - Cancer Arch & Mitchell 18
Acceptance (2016)
and Action
Questionnaire
Cardiovascular CVD-AAQ Cardiovascular Spatola et al. 7
Disease disease (2014)
Acceptance
and Action
Questionnaire
Experiential EACQ Caregiving Losada, Márquez- 15
Avoidance in González, Romero-
Caregiving Moreno, & López
Questionnaire (2014)
Chronic Illness CIAQ Chronic illness Beacham, Linfield, 20
Acceptance Kinman, & Payne-
Questionnaire Murphy (2015)
Chronic Pain CPAQ Chronic pain McCracken, 20
Acceptance Vowles, &
Questionnaire Eccleston (2004)
25
Table 2.1 Continued

Items
Chronic Pain CPAQ-8 Chronic pain Fish, McGuire, 8
Acceptance Hogan, Morrison,
Questionnaire-8 & Stewart (2010)
Psychological PIPS Chronic pain Wicksell, Lekander, 12
Inflexibility in Sorjonen, & Olsson
Pain Scale (2010)
Willingness and WADS Delusions Martins et al. 12
Acceptance of (2018)
Delusions Scale
Acceptance and AADQ Diabetes Gregg, Callaghan, 11
Action Diabetes Hayes, & Glenn-
Questionnaire Lawson (2007)
Acceptance and AAEpQ Epilepsy Lundgren, Dahl, & 8
Action Epilepsy Hayes (2008)
Questionnaire
Food Acceptance FAAQ Food craving Juarascio, Forman, 10
and Awareness Timko, Butryn, &
Questionnaire Goodwin (2011)
Irritable Bowel IBSAAQ Irritable bowel Ferreira, 20
Syndrome syndrome Eugenicos, Morris,
Acceptance & Gillanders
and Action (2013)
Questionnaire
Acceptance AAQ-OC Obsessions and Jacoby, 13
and Action compulsions Abramowitz,
Questionnaire for Buchholz, Reuman,
Obsessions and & Blakey (2018)
Compulsions
Parental PAAQ Parenting Cheron, 15
Acceptance Ehrenreich, &
and Action Pincus (2009)
Questionnaire
Parenting-Specific PSPF Parenting Brassell et al. 7
Psychological (2016)
Flexibility
Parental PPF Parenting (pre- Burke & Moore 19
Psychological adolescents and (2014)
Flexibility adolescents)
Parental 6-PAQ Parents Greene, Field, 18
Acceptance Fargo, & Twohig
Questionnaire (2015)
(continued )
26
Table 2.1 Continued

Items
Avoidance and AIS Smoking Gifford, 13
Inflexibility Scale Antonuccio,
Kohlenberg, Hayes,
& Piasecki (2002)
Social Anxiety SA-AAQ Social anxiety MacKenzie & 19
Acceptance Kocovski (2010)
and Action
Questionnaire
Brief Social B-SA-AAQ Social anxiety MacKenzie et al. 8
Anxiety (2017)
Acceptance
and Action
Questionnaire
Acceptance AAQ-S Stigma Levin, Luoma, 21
and Action Lillis, Hayes, &
Questionnaire— Vilardaga (2014)
Stigma
Acceptance AAQ-SA Substance abuse Luoma, Drake, 16
and Action Kohlenberg, &
Questionnaire— Hayes (2011)
Substance Abuse
Tinnitus TAQ Tinnitus Westin, Hayes, & 12
Acceptance Andersson (2008)
Questionnaire
Acceptance AAQ-TTM Trichotillomania Houghton et al. 9
and Action (2014)
Questionnaire for
Trichotillomania
Acceptance AAQ-W Weight Lillis & Hayes 22
and Action (2008)
Questionnaire for
Weight-Related
Difficulties
Acceptance AAQW-R Weight Palmeira, Cunha, 10
and Action Pinto-Gouveia,
Questionnaire for Carvalho, & Lillis
Weight-Related (2016)
Difficulties
Revised
Work-Related WAAQ Work Bond, Lloyd, & 7

Acceptance Guenole (2013)
and Action
Questionnaire
27
Assessment27
I flexibly pay attention to

what is occurring in the
present moment
high
ATTENTION
TO PRESENT
SCALE
I willingly
low
accept my I am clear
thoughts and about what I
feelings even ACCEPTANCE choose to
hig SCALE I spend h
when I don’t h most of my time on hig value in life
like them attentional autopilot
low
low
VALUES
I constantly I don’t
CLARITY
struggle with know what
SCALE
my thoughts I want
and feelings from life
My thoughts tell me
how things really I don’t manage
are and what I need to act on the
DEFUSION to do things I care
SCALE The person I call about low
low me is my
I see each of thoughts and I identify the
my thoughts h feelings about hig
as just one of hig COMMITMENT & h actions I need
myself TAKING ACTION to take to put
many ways to
SCALE my values into
think about
practice, and I
things–what
low
see them
I do next is up SELF AS through
to me CONTEXT
SCALE
high
The person I call me

knows what I am
thinking and feeling
but is distinct from
that process
Figure 2.2 ACT ADVISOR for measuring six processes of psychological flexibility in
therapy. Based on the ACT ADVISOR created by David Chantry and modified with
permission.
Behavioral commitment
Do you spend more time on what you care about or regulating your
anxiety?
What do you spend most of your time on?
Does regulating your anxiety take up a lot of your time?
When Hayes, Strosahl, and Wilson (2011) rewrote the original ACT text
(Hayes, Strosahl, & Wilson, 1999), they emphasized an “acceptance and mindful-
ness side” (acceptance, defusion, self-as-context, and being present) and a “values
and behavior change side” (values and behavioral commitment). We find this is
a useful way to simplify the six processes of change (see Figure 1.1 in Chapter 1).
If the client is caught up in their mind, then they are low on the acceptance
and mindfulness side. If they are unaware of what they want and not engaging
28
in meaningful activities, then they are low on the values and behavioral commit-
ment side. It can also be useful to think about working on either side rather than
on a specific process. We often say to our practicum students, “It looks like you
should spend some time on the mindfulness side with that client.” Interestingly,
if you are working with a client and stuck on one side—meaning you have spent
lots of time working on that side with little movement—it might be wise to work
on the other side for a while. Sometimes, behavior change is hard because the
client is too fused with thoughts or fears what change would entail. Thus, even
though behavior change is the place where the client is struggling, the most useful
move might be to work on acceptance and defusion before going back to values
and behavioral commitments. Alternatively, a client could be unwilling to work
on acceptance because they cannot see the reason (or value) behind sitting with
discomfort.
In summary, you should assess the role of psychological inflexibility in your
client’s presentation in two ways. First, have the client complete a standardized as-
sessment of psychological flexibility. The AAQ-II is a good option, but we suggest
using something context-specific if one is available for your client’s presentation.
Second, assess the six processes of change at the individual level, which can be
guided by a measure like the ACT ADVISOR. If the client is low on psycholog-
ical flexibility (high on psychological inflexibility), then ACT is likely an appro-
priate treatment. The information from the ACT ADVISOR will tell you which
processes need the most attention. Finally, for simplicity, sometimes we lump the
six processes of change into two: acceptance and mindfulness, and values and be-
havioral commitments.
3. Assess for contextual, historical, or cultural variables

that play into the case presentation
Most intake assessments have sections on history, culture, sexual orientation,

gender identity, religion, education, family, and so on. We suggest having a list of
all the pertinent variables you would want to know about your client. Then, dis-
cuss them with your client to see which ones are most meaningful and impactful
to them. It is important to know these things, as they influence the way informa-
tion is received (e.g., the meaning and function of events) and tells you what your
client’s most powerful reinforcers will be.
Another way to think of this: Go into the session recognizing that you have
never had a client like the one in front of you and that your job is to understand
the variables that make this client who they are, which will tell you what type
of therapeutic work will be most meaningful to them. For example, if you are
working with a client who is religious, ask, “How would changing this behavior
affect your spiritual practice?” Similarly, if your client is married and has children,
you could ask, “How does having a family affect you?” The key point is to hold
preconceptions you may have about your client as hypotheses to be tested through
discussions with the client.
29
Assessment29
4. Set up an ongoing assessment program for treatment
This phase is relatively simple. We encourage finding a main symptomatic

measure for your client’s presenting issue. If you do not already have this set
up in your practice, it will take a little work at the beginning, but once you
start to build a file of these different measures, they will be easy to retrieve
as you need them. There is a free version of assessment for every diagnosis
out there. We highly suggest performing this assessment at baseline, then at
whatever frequency makes sense for your client and their presentation (e.g.,
weekly, every other week), and certainly at the last session. Determining fre-
quency for the assessments can be figured out (1) empirically, by referring
to published clinical trials, or (2) using clinical judgment, by considering if
the behavior could reasonably change in a week. For example, panic attacks,
compulsions, and substance use can change quickly, whereas worry and ru-
mination are likely to be slow to change. We are also fans of having the client
track specific actions on a regular basis. For the majority of disorders, there
is an overt action that can be tracked. Sometimes it is a proxy variable for the
presenting issue. For example, if you are working on depression, you might
track bedtime and exercise, whereas you would track amount of substance
used for substance use or abuse.
We recommend graphing outcome data along with psychological flexibility
scores. If you are not interested in purchasing membership in a Web-based data
collection system, you can enter these data into a spreadsheet so that it shows
the scores on a graph with clinical and nonclinical means, which can facilitate
scoring. Similarly, it can be useful to have additional files containing client total
scores so you can easily track outcomes throughout therapy.
REFERENCES
Arch, J. J., & Mitchell, J. L. (2016). An acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) group
intervention for cancer survivors experiencing anxiety at re-entry. Psychooncology,
25(5), 610–615. doi:10.1002/pon.3890
Basarkod, G., Sahdra, B., & Ciarrochi, J. (2018). Body Image–Acceptance and Action
Questionnaire–5: An abbreviation using genetic algorithms. Behavior Therapy,
49(3), 388–402. doi:10.1016/j.beth.2017.09.006
Beacham, A. O., Linfield, K., Kinman, C. R., & Payne-Murphy, J. (2015). The Chronic
Illness Acceptance Questionnaire: Confirmatory factor analysis and prediction of
perceived disability in an online chronic illness support group sample. Journal of
Contextual Behavioral Science, 4(2), 96–102. doi:10.1016/j.jcbs.2015.03.001
Bond, F. W., Hayes, S. C., Baer, R. A., Carpenter, K. M., Guenole, N., Orcutt, H.
K., . . . Zettle, R. D. (2011). Preliminary psychometric properties of the Acceptance
and Action Questionnaire- II: A revised measure of psychological inflexibility
and experiential avoidance. Behavior Therapy, 42(4), 676– 688. doi:10.1016/
j.beth.2011.03.007
30
Bond, F. W., Lloyd, J., & Guenole, N. (2013). The Work-related Acceptance and Action
Questionnaire (WAAQ): Initial psychometric findings and their implications for
measuring psychological flexibility in specific contexts. Journal of Occupational and
Organizational Psychology, 86(3), 331–347. doi:10.1111/joop.12001
Brassell, A. A., Rosenberg, E., Parent, J., Rough, J. N., Fondacaro, K., & Seehuus, M.
(2016). Parent’s psychological flexibility: Associations with parenting and child
psychosocial well-being. Journal of Contextual Behavioral Science, 5(2), 111–120.
doi:10.1016/j.jcbs.2016.03.001
Brockman, R., Kiernan, M., & Murrell, E. (2015). Psychometric properties of two brief
versions of the Voices Acceptance and Action Scale (VAAS): Implications for the
second-wave and third-wave behavioural and cognitive approaches to auditory
hallucinations. Clinical Psychology & Psychotherapy 22(5), 450–459. doi:10.1002/
cpp.1916
Burke, K., & Moore, S. (2014). Development of the Parental Psychological Flexibility
Questionnaire. Child Psychiatry & Human Development, 46(4), 548–557.
doi:10.1007/s10578-014-0495-x
Callaghan, G. M., Sandoz, E. K., Darrow, S. M., & Feeney, T. K. (2015). The Body
Image Psychological Inflexibility Scale: Development and psychometric properties.
Psychiatry Research, 226(1), 45–52. doi:10.1016/j.psychres.2014.11.039
Cheron, D. M., Ehrenreich, J. T., & Pincus, D. B. (2009). Assessment of parental ex-
periential avoidance in a clinical sample of children with anxiety disorders. Child
Psychiatry & Human Development, 40(3), 383–403. doi:10.1007/s10578-009-0135-z
Ferreira, N. B., Eugenicos, M. P., Morris, P. G., & Gillanders, D. T. (2013). Measuring
acceptance in irritable bowel syndrome: Preliminary validation of an adapted
scale and construct utility. Quality of Life Research, 22(7), 1761–1766. doi:10.1007/
s11136-012-0299-z
Fish, R. A., McGuire, B., Hogan, M., Morrison, T. G., & Stewart, I. (2010). Validation
of the Chronic Pain Acceptance Questionnaire (CPAQ) in an internet sample and
development and preliminary validation of the CPAQ-8. Pain, 149(3), 435–443.
doi:10.1016/j.pain.2009.12.016
Gifford, E. V., Antonuccio, D. O., Kohlenberg, B. S., Hayes, S. C., & Piasecki, M. M.
(2002). Combining Bupropion SR with acceptance and commitment-based be-
havioral therapy for smoking cessation: Preliminary results from a randomized
controlled trial. Paper presented at the Association for Advancement of Behavioral
Therapy, Reno, NV.
Greene, R. L., Field, C. E., Fargo, J. D., & Twohig, M. P. (2015). Development and val-
idation of the parental acceptance questionnaire (6-PAQ). Journal of Contextual
Behavioral Science, 4(3), 170–175. doi:10.1016/j.jcbs.2015.05.003
Gregg, J. A., Callaghan, G. M., Hayes, S. C., & Glenn-Lawson, J. L. (2007). Improving
diabetes self- management through acceptance, mindfulness, and values: A
randomized controlled trial. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 75(2),
336–343. doi:10.1037/0022-006X.75.2.336
Hayes, S. C., Strosahl, K., & Wilson, K. G. (1999). Acceptance and commitment therapy: An
experiential approach to behavior change. New York: Guilford Press.
Hayes, S. C., Strosahl, K. D., & Wilson, K. G. (2011). Acceptance and commitment therapy
(2nd ed.): The process and practice of mindful change. New York: Guilford Press.
31
Assessment31
Houghton, D. C., Compton, S. N., Twohig, M. P., Saunders, S. M., Franklin, M. E., Neal-
Barnett, A. M., . . . Woods, D. W. (2014). Measuring the role of psychological in-
flexibility in trichotillomania. Psychiatry Research, 220(1-2), 356–361. doi:10.1016/
j.psychres.2014.08.003
Jacoby, R. J., Abramowitz, J. S., Buchholz, J., Reuman, L., & Blakey, S. M. (2018).
Experiential avoidance in the context of obsessions: Development and validation
of the Acceptance and Action Questionnaire for Obsessions and Compulsions.
Journal of Obsessive-Compulsive and Related Disorders, 19, 34–43. doi:10.1016/
j.jocrd.2018.07.003
Juarascio, A., Forman, E., Timko, C. A., Butryn, M., & Goodwin, C. (2011). The devel-
opment and validation of the Food craving Acceptance and Action Questionnaire
(FAAQ). Eating Behaviors, 12(3), 182–187. doi:10.1016/j.eatbeh.2011.04.008
Levin, M. E., Luoma, J. B., Lillis, J., Hayes, S. C., & Vilardaga, R. (2014). The Acceptance
and Action Questionnaire–Stigma (AAQ-S): Developing a measure of psycholog-
ical flexibility with stigmatizing thoughts. Journal of Contextual Behavioral Science,
3(1), 21–26. doi:10.1016/j.jcbs.2013.11.003
Lillis, J., & Hayes, S. C. (2008). Measuring avoidance and inflexibility in weight related
problems. International Journal of Behavioral Consultation and Therapy, 4(1), 30–
40. doi:10.1037/h0100865
Losada, A., Márquez-González, M., Romero-Moreno, R., & López, J. (2014). Development
and validation of the Experiential Avoidance in Caregiving Questionnaire (EACQ).
Aging Mental Health, 18(7), 897–904. doi:10.1080/13607863.2014.896868
Lundgren, T., Dahl, J., & Hayes, S. C. (2008). Evaluation of mediators of change in
the treatment of epilepsy with acceptance and commitment therapy. Journal of
Behavioral Medicine, 31(3), 225–235. doi:10.1007/s10865-008-9151-x
Luoma, J., Drake, C. E., Kohlenberg, B. S., & Hayes, S. C. (2011). Substance abuse and
psychological flexibility: The development of a new measure. Addiction Research &
Theory, 19(1), 3–13. doi:10.3109/16066359.2010.524956
MacKenzie, M. B., & Kocovski, N. L. (2010). Self-reported acceptance of social anx-
iety symptoms: Development and validation of the Social Anxiety–Acceptance and
Action Questionnaire. International Journal of Behavioral Consultation and Therapy,
6, 214–232. doi:10.1037/h0100909
MacKenzie, M. B., Kocovski, N. L., Blackie, R. A., Carrique, L. C., Fleming, J. E., &
Antony, M. M. (2017). Development of a brief version of the Social Anxiety–
Acceptance and Action Questionnaire. Journal of Psychopathology and Behavioral
Assessment, 39(2), 342–354. doi:10.1007/s10862-016-9585-3
Martins, M. J. R. V., Castilho, P., Macedo, A. F., Pereira, A. T., Vagos, P., Carvalho,
D., . . . Barreto Carvalho, C. (2018). Willingness and Acceptance of Delusions
Scale: Early findings on a new instrument for psychological flexibility. Psychosis,
10(3), 198–207. doi:10.1080/17522439.2018.1502340
McCracken, L. M., Vowles, K. E., & Eccleston, C. (2004). Acceptance of chronic
pain: Component analysis and a revised assessment method. Pain, 107(1), 159–166.
doi:10.1016/j.pain.2003.10.012
Morrison, K. L., Smith, B. M., Ong, C. W., Lee, E. B., Friedel, J. E., Odum, A., . . . Twohig,
M. P. (2019). Effects of acceptance and commitment therapy on impulsive decision-
making. Behavior Modification. doi:10.1177/0145445519833041
32
Ong, C. W., Lee, E. B., Krafft, J., Terry, C. L., Barrett, T. S., Levin, M. E., & Twohig, M. P.
(2019). A randomized controlled trial of acceptance and commitment therapy for
clinical perfectionism. Journal of Obsessive-Compulsive and Related Disorders, 22.
doi:10.1016/j.jocrd.2019.100444
Palmeira, L., Cunha, M., Pinto-Gouveia, J., Carvalho, S., & Lillis, J. (2016). New
developments in the assessment of weight-related experiential avoidance (AAQW-
Revised). Journal of Contextual Behavioral Science, 5(3), 193–200. doi:10.1016/
j.jcbs.2016.06.001
Sandoz, E. K., Wilson, K. G., Merwin, R. M., & Kellum, K. K. (2013). Assessment of body
image flexibility: The Body Image-Acceptance and Action Questionnaire. Journal of
Contextual Behavioral Science, 2(1-2), 39–48. doi:10.1016/j.jcbs.2013.03.002
Shawyer, F., Ratcliff, K., Mackinnon, A., Farhall, J., Hayes, S. C., & Copolov, D. (2007).
The Voices Acceptance and Action Scale (VAAS): Pilot data. Journal of Clinical
Psychology, 63(6), 593–606. doi:10.1002/jclp.20366
Spatola, C. A., Cappella, E. A., Goodwin, C. L., Baruffi, M., Malfatto, G., Facchini,
M., . . . Molinari, E. (2014). Development and initial validation of the Cardiovascular
Disease Acceptance and Action Questionnaire (CVD-AAQ) in an Italian sample of
cardiac patients. Frontiers in Psychology 5, 1284. doi:10.3389/fpsyg.2014.01284
Westin, V. Z., Hayes, S. C., & Andersson, G. (2008). Is it the sound or your relationship
to it? The role of acceptance in predicting tinnitus impact. Behaviour Research and
Therapy, 46(12), 1259–1265. doi:10.1016/j.brat.2008.08.008
Whiting, D. L., Deane, F. P., Ciarrochi, J., McLeod, H. J., & Simpson, G. K. (2015).
Validating measures of psychological flexibility in a population with acquired brain
injury. Psychological Assessment, 27(2), 415. doi:10.1037/pas0000050
Wicksell, R. K., Lekander, M., Sorjonen, K., & Olsson, G. L. (2010). The Psychological
Inflexibility in Pain Scale (PIPS)—Statistical properties and model fit of an instru-
ment to assess change processes in pain related disability. European Journal of Pain,
14(7), 771 e771–714. doi:10.1016/j.ejpain.2009.11.015
3
General Guide to the ACT

Therapeutic Context
Over the past 15 years, I have worked with many professionals who are trying to
learn how to do ACT. Graduate students and interns have actually been the eas-
iest to train because they are less set in their worldviews and therapy styles. It can
be more difficult to teach more established therapists how to do ACT well. Even
though they are fast at picking up techniques, they have a habit of incorporating
those skills into their existing worldview and therapy styles. For example, if a
client says something like, “Nothing ever seems to work out for me,” someone
new to ACT might correctly recognize fusion but incorrectly state, “See how you
are fusing with that thought right now.” In case you are wondering, a better re-
sponse would be highlighting the function of that thought, with, “And how does
that thought affect you?” One could also teach defusing with a statement like, “It is
all really in how you respond to that thought.” In ACT, a function-based response
is needed. This means responding to the function, purpose, or effect of the client’s
words, rather than their content.
I have also supervised people who started out therapy by explaining the ACT
model to the client. They literally drew the hexaflex on a whiteboard and explained
what each process was. While they are technically teaching the six ACT processes
of change, the manner in which the processes are being taught will render the ac-
tual incorporation of those six processes of change unlikely.
The first psychotherapy I (M.P.T.) learned to do was ACT, and I only learned
how to do traditional cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) on my internship.
Frankly, I found that doing traditional CBT was surprisingly difficult; under-
standing the model and manner in which it is implemented took me several
months. Although I quickly learned the techniques and what to say, it took much
longer to really get the why and how, knowing what choices to make from this
new worldview.
I tell this to illustrate that learning how to do a new treatment like ACT
is more than learning techniques or memorizing what to say in each session.
34
You also need to incorporate the ACT model into your worldview and un-
derstand the finer points of how ACT is implemented. This is especially im-
portant with ACT, which emphasizes the therapeutic relationship as a vehicle
for helping clients become more psychologically flexible. So, really getting the
underlying therapeutic stance and bringing that into your interactions with
clients is critical.
We (ACT therapists) conceptualize psychological issues that stem from psy-
chological inflexibility as the result of maladaptive side effects of cognition.
Through ACT, we try to teach clients to interact with their thoughts and other
inner experiences in a new way so that the same verbal stimuli have a different
impact on their actions. We believe the therapeutic context is an important me-
dium in which to do that. Therapy is a place where clients can learn to interact
with thoughts and feelings differently. Hopefully, the therapeutic relationship
and context are strong enough that this new way of interacting with internal
experiences transfers to situations outside of therapy. Then, as clients have suc-
cess with this new way of interacting, they can experience the reinforcers that
come along with these actions. These actions will continue because they work for
the client in achieving their goals and doing what matters.
In this chapter, we cover key tips on how to make therapy more ACT-
consistent. This will include issues related to therapy style, the therapist’s
orientation toward the work, the way in which therapy is presented, relation-
ship issues, and stylistic aspects. In many ways, these are the hardest to teach
in a book. Viewing some videos of ACT might be helpful for learning what
ACT feels like. Still, some general guidance will, hopefully, start you down the
right path.
ACT BASICS
Acknowledge our shared, common challenges of being human
The issues that clients experience are functionally the same issues just about eve-
ryone on the planet experiences, including you. Your clients might experience
them more often and more intensely than others, but these struggles are the same
at a functional level. Almost everyone experiences fear, frustration, feelings of
rejection, and so on. Our clients have generally gotten into a deep and messy
struggle with their inner experiences. Presenting inner experiences in this way
can be particularly helpful, as it shows clients that nothing is inherently wrong
with them. They simply got into an unworkable pattern. We understand their sit-
uation because we deal with many of the same things. We also have thoughts we
do not like, that show up at the wrong time, and that interfere with the things we
want to do. While our inner experiences may get in the way less, we can still relate
to clients’ issue as fellow humans. Teach, model, and act like it is OK to have all
sorts of inner experiences.
35
General Guide to the ACT Therapeutic Context35
Accept clients as they are and do not treat them

like babies
I (M.P.T.) once had a client tell me she thought about killing herself over the
weekend. I believe my response was something like, “How powerful were those
thoughts?” and “What did you do with them?” Making a mental note to assess risk
later in the session, we continued that discussion, focusing on how she interacted
with those thoughts. I treated her suicidal thoughts like other thoughts we had
discussed at previous sessions, focusing on the function of the thought (how she
reacts to it) rather than its content. I did not make a big deal out of them. Toward
the end of the conversation I said something like, “As long as you don’t act on
those thoughts, we will have time to figure all this out.” At the end of our course
of therapy I asked her what she learned that made the biggest difference to her.
She said, “When I was suicidal, you were so calm and acted like I was fine and all
would be OK. That really helped me see my struggles in a different way.” I think
treating her thoughts as just thoughts helped her to treat her thoughts similarly.
I was able to model something she needed to practice. I acted like it was OK
to have those thoughts, and so she acted like it was OK to have those thoughts.
Although I was sure to assess the severity and risk of suicidality later that session,
I didn’t start there or treat the thoughts themselves as a sign she was at imminent
risk. If I had treated the thought itself as dangerous and scary, then she would
have as well, and we would have lost a perfect opportunity to practice defusion
together.
Here is another way of looking at this issue. As a therapist I am pretty even-
keeled. My mood and demeanor stay pretty constant and I am primarily focused on
behavior change. If the client presents with low mood or with lots of energy, I still
stay pretty constant. I supervise many students and I find they shift along with the
client. I think they are trying to be validating and responsive to the client. There
is nothing particularly problematic about that, other than possibly indicating to
clients that mood is something worth responding to. What I see that concerns me
is when a client shows up with depressed mood and a typically upbeat therapist
starts coddling the client. The therapist slows down their speech, gets quiet, and
starts speaking in a sensitive way. When watching the video, it feels to me that the
client is being protected because they are in a sensitive place. I prefer to model
that clients can handle sad emotions and treat them accordingly. For example,
I was doing a situational exposure with a client who was somewhat resistant to
the exercise, and I gently kept the pressure on because I thought the action the
client was attempting to engage in was reasonable for their place in therapy. The
fact that I asked like it was totally fine for the client, I think, encouraged the client
to engage.
This even-keeled approach is one way of communicating acceptance, but re-
member, it is the function (impact) you have on the client, not the topography
(what it looks like). There are a lot of ways to model acceptance with your clients,
and we encourage you to seek out opportunities to see different therapists at work
36
(in videos, trainings, etc.). The important part is to model for clients that what-
ever thoughts and feelings come up are natural and OK, and that they are not bad,
scary, true, or otherwise overpowering experiences that have to be acted on or
avoided at all costs. In summary, model that internal experiences are OK to have.
Your client will eventually follow your lead.
It is always about the client’s experience: You learn

from doing
As I was providing consultation to my colleague this morning we talked about

how to help a client diagnosed with obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD) see
her obsessions differently. The client feared that if she had impure thoughts
about a man he would then be more likely to sexually assault her. To those of
you familiar with thought– action fusion, you will recognize this response
style: Thinking something makes it more likely it will happen. As a bystander,
we know our thoughts do not really make events more or less likely—at least
in the way we are presenting it here. My consultee and I talked about what ex-
periential activities the client could do to see that thoughts have no effects on
the odds of events happening. For example, she could interview her friends or
design experiments. Both these examples are consistent with best practice and
would likely be helpful. But if we are looking to help the client see this obsession
differently, the most powerful way to do so is through real-life experiences. We
would want her to have many direct experiences that would help her see these
obsessions differently. Thus, we talked about setting up as many situations as
possible that would bring up her obsessions so that she could practice interacting
with them differently.
We do everything we can to work with experiences in vivo rather than discuss
them. We certainly avoid telling a client how something works. We would rather
give them the space to work with it and then help them accurately appreciate
what just occurred (i.e., see contingencies as they are, rather than the verbal rep-
resentation of them). The client’s life will show the client how things work. Create
experiences in and outside of session that teach psychological flexibility.
Metaphorical and experiential
As written earlier, we do everything we can to make therapy experiential; the

title of the first book on ACT was Acceptance and Commitment Therapy: An
Experiential Approach to Therapy (Hayes, Strosahl, & Wilson, 1999). The main
idea is that people will rigidly follow rules. At worst, rules are inaccurate; at
best, they are generally accurate. However, for most rules, there are times when
they do not apply. For example, a rule like “be nice to others” is usually true, but
there are times when being kind to others could lead to being taken advantage
of. We believe rules naturally developed through interactions with the world are
37
more flexible to the contingencies that are present. Thus, therapy is delivered via
experiences—rather than didactic explanations—as much as possible.
The number one option for ACT, if possible, is to teach these concepts in an ac-
tual situation. If the client struggles with anxiety, find situations that elicit anxiety
and then teach psychological flexibility. If the client struggles with depression,
work with depression that is present in the moment.
Therapy can be relatively easy if you follow these steps: (1) ask the client about
a struggle they had since you last saw them; (2) continue to ask about that event
using open-ended questions; (3) once the target internal experience, such as
thoughts, feelings, sensations, or urges, starts to show, keep pushing; and (4) when
you feel there is enough internal experience present to work with, start coaching
the client on how to use psychological flexibility with that experience.
Here is a simplified example of the general pattern we suggest for your average
ACT session.
Therapist (T): Tell me about a moment this week when you felt triggered.
Client (C): I was at work and my supervisor asked me to go clean the back
of the store.
T: What happened for you in that moment?
C: I had a reaction like, “What the hell. That’s the worst job. I’ve been here a
long time. Give that job to a new person. I bet he’s giving it to me out of
spite.”
T: What else were you thinking?
C: I just thought this was BS. Nobody wants to clean up the mess in the back
of the store. It’s the worst.
T: Which emotions where you experiencing at that time?
C: Anger. Hopelessness. Frustration.
T: Are you experiencing any of the same thoughts and emotions now, as we
talk about it?
C: Yes. I’m sort of worked up.
T: OK. Are you willing to practice something with me right now?
C. Sure.
T: Tell me how negatively you experience the feeling you are experiencing
right now.
C: I hate it. I feel weak and helpless.
T: Thanks. Rather than running from this, trying to lessen it, or otherwise
make it different, let’s just hang out in it. But let’s not just suffer through
it. Let’s find a reason that it is worth hanging out in. Tell me a way life
would be a little better if this did not push you around.
C: I would stay out of trouble at work. There have certainly been times when
I’ve blown my top and gotten into trouble at work.
T: OK, cool. Let’s go a step further than staying out of trouble and go toward
a job that you find meaningful. Let’s picture you heading off on a journey
with a destination of “meaningful work” and in your backpack are
thoughts like “I hate this guy” or “Life is unfair.” There are also feelings
38
like anger, frustration, helplessness, and so on. It’s just that you have to
bring this backpack along with you. Setting it down is not an option;
everything you need is in there, like your food, water, and rain gear. If
you want to bring the stuff you need to live, you also have to bring along
some stuff you don’t like.
The target emotion was a little bit present, so we asked open-ended questions
to make it more present. Once it was notably there, we moved into skills teaching,
which can be done through experiential exercises or metaphors. Although this ex-
ample was brief and contrived, it illustrated our point that ACT is best done expe-
rientially. Find or create experiences to teach psychological flexibility experientially.
Resist the urge to explain what the metaphor means

at the end
Humans dislike uncertainty or confusion, and it is pretty common for the ther-
apist to feel the urge to make sure the client understands what the therapist just
taught, even though clarifying things may not always be therapeutically indi-
cated. For example, saying “Struggling with anxiety is like struggling with quick-
sand” is more effective than saying “Struggling with anxiety is like struggling with
quicksand—you know, the more you fight against it the larger it will be.” This is
because by stating the rule, you are undermining their opportunity to contact
direct contingencies in their life, to explore and reflect on their own experiences
with anxiety, and to learn the consequences of how they react to it. You might as
well just tell the client to not struggle against their anxiety. Instead, try and engage
the client throughout every exercise and metaphor so you can track whether they
are following or getting anything from it. For instance, if we were to expand on the
backpack exercise from the previous section it might look like this:
T: I’d like to do a little exercise with you. Are you OK with that?
C: Yes.
T: OK, let’s say you are going on a journey. It’s a long one, maybe a couple
weeks. But because this is therapy we are not talking about a trip to
Hawaii or a national park but a journey toward something important to
you. Like most things that are important, you can only work toward it; it
is very hard to accomplish. For the sake of this exercise, what journey do
you want to talk about?
C: I hate my job and want a different one.
T: I am totally cool with helping you go after something else, but I would
like that to be motivated by going after something better, rather than run-
ning from something frustrating. What is it?
C: It’s lots of things, but a part of it is I stay where I am because it is easy, but
I have no passion for retail. I’m in school to work with animals, but there
are very few jobs in that area and retail is everywhere.
39
T: OK, let’s focus on going toward what you care about rather than away
from what annoys you. So, we are going on a journey to work with an-
imals. That is your direction. But to go on this journey you will need a
backpack for food, water, appropriate clothing, and so on. Tell me what
you would pack.
C: Yeah, water, food, rain gear, maps, sunscreen, and stuff like that. I hike so
I get it.
T: But you also have to carry along some things that are just going to show
up. Fear, frustration, anxiety, and anger also get thrown in the backpack.
Tell me about those things.
C: Oh, you know, I get pissed off, I hate things, I get frustrated. It’s how I am.
T: Tell me more.
C: When things don’t go my way, my emotions build up. I struggle to listen
to others and be told what to do. I hate doing things that feel beneath me.
T: How will this show up on this journey?
C: I’m sure it will not be easy. I will likely have to interact with others. Lots
of stuff.
T: OK, cool. All these things as well as the gear you need are in your back-
pack. Are you cool with carrying all this along?
C: Do I have a choice?
T: You do. You can have this pack strapped on tight while focusing on
moving forward. You can also keep checking in the pack to see what is
in there: complaining about how much there is, going over in your mind
about how unfair it is that your pack is so heavy. You can compare your
pack to others’ packs. So I’ll ask again: Are you willing to carry the pack
just as it is?
C: Wow. Good question.
Keep teaching through metaphor. Do not summarize into a rule.
Fit of example/metaphor is more important than saying

it correctly
Treatment matching is important. Using the example of tolerating the distress

of waiting for your table to be ready at a fine restaurant probably will not reso-
nate with a rural rancher as might the frustration of a long and drawn-out repair
project. We will not belabor this point, but as you work with your client, try and
match your examples to the client’s life. If you are going to use a sport example,
ask what sport they are into. If they are not into any sport, ask them what they are
into. We would assume most things in life have a similar growth curve, from being
difficult and frustrating to being easier but still a struggle at times.
Descriptions that match with the client will have a greater impact and be more
memorable. For example, all of us authors enjoy rock climbing. A discussion
involving climbing will be much more relatable and impactful than one about
40
tennis, which we are not really into. It is fine if you do not know the intricacies of
your client’s interest; they can explain that to you. Trying to match your discussions
to things that matter to your client will be more therapeutically meaningful and
show that you are individualizing treatment to your client. Here is a quick hypo-
thetical example:
T: I’d like to share an example of how we show willingness with everyday

events. What is a sport you are into—tennis, basketball, football?
C: I really don’t do those types of sports. I’m into rock climbing.
T: Cool. I don’t know much about that but I’d be shocked if learning to rock
climb was notably different from learning other sports. Tell me about
your goals with climbing when you first started.
C: I was just doing it with friends for fun, but pretty quickly I wanted to be
decent at it and do harder climbs.
T: OK, tell me about the emotions you experienced as you were learning.
C: It went back and forth between enjoyment and frustration. I had good
times and then would really struggle with some of the new things I was
learning. I’d struggle and then slowly get better at them.
T: Do you feel you have come a long way in your climbing?
C: Yes, but I also have a very long way to go. It’s weird.
T: How is this like our work with your phobia?
C: Very, very similar.
T: How is it different?
C: Good question. I think I gave myself a lot more space with learning to
climb than I do in therapy. I never thought I’d be a hotshot climber in a
few months, but I want to be over my phobia ASAP. That’s sort of weird.
We hope you, the reader, can see how matching the description to the client can
help keep the client engaged and interested in therapy. The therapist knew little
about climbing but was open to letting the client describe the sport. If we were
the therapist, we would read a little about climbing so we had some examples to
share with the client at future sessions. It would keep the client’s interest and build
rapport. For example:
T: After our session, I started looking up climbing on the internet and

saw that two climbers had just set the speed record for climbing the
nose on El Capitan. How much work would it take for you to get to
that place and what would you have to do to get there? Now, I kind of
doubt you could set a new speed record, but is that a climb you could
accomplish?
C: I guess technically, but there are many climbing and equipment
techniques I would need to learn. I would need to be in much better
shape. I’d have to practice a lot. So maybe, but it would be a ton of work.
T: And it seems you could break the work down into pieces and work on
them individually. How is that like our work?
41
C: I guess you can work toward any life goal. You would just take it piece by
piece. You might get there or you might not, but you can try.
Use examples and metaphors that are meaningful to the client.
ACT IS A PROCESS-B ASED INTER VENTION
The client’s experiences are right—no arguing
ACT focuses on function over form. Whether something is technically right or

wrong is secondary to its effect on the client. Thus, watch for the pull to argue
when the client says something that is factually wrong. Focus on what effect the
thought has on the client. For example, if a client says, “I feel like I am going
to pass out when I am experiencing a panic attack,” rather than discussing how
passing out is very unlikely to occur because blood pressure is elevated during a
panic attack, ask how that fear affects the client and what they do when it shows
up. Similarly, if you are working with a client diagnosed with OCD and they say,
“I tried the acceptance things you talked about and I had the worst week ever,” do
not tell them “acceptance is a skill and you need to practice” or “maybe you were
doing it wrong.” Just listen. There is something accurate in the client’s experience.
It is your job to help the client find that and use it to guide their future choices.
Sometimes, they report things that are not accurate, but give them time to con-
tact more experiences and they will see how things work for them. Let clients’ real
experiences guide their choices.
Don’t explain the six processes or draw the hexaflex
This is one of the most common “mistakes” I see new ACT therapists commit. In
many other therapies, conceptualizing the case and the process through which
treatment works is a common way to start therapy. But if you understand the
downfall of rule governance and psychological inflexibility, you can probably see
the downside of teaching clients a model of how psychopathology develops and
how to get out of it. In ACT, we prefer to help clients pay closer attention to how
things are working for them. Our goal is to decrease rule following. If clients can
pay closer attention to how things work in their lives, then they can figure out
ways of responding that will work better in the long run. You will need to notice
your pull to explain things. Walk the client through ACT; do not teach them about
ACT. I often think about it like a magic show (not that ACT is magic) in which
being walked through the trick is what makes it fascinating. If you were told what
is occurring or where you need to be watching, it would take much of the enjoy-
ment out of it. Another way I like to explain it to my practicum students is, help
the client figure it out on their own. I had a practicum student say, “It’s one point if
you say it and two points if the client says it first.”
42
The importance of modeling psychological flexibility
Therapy might be the only setting in the client’s life where psychological flexi-
bility is normal. You generally have about 1 hour a week to help the client see the
benefits of responding to internal experiences in this new way. It is hard to have a
lot of impact when the rest of the world is telling the client to feel differently, that
having only positive emotions is the best way to do things, and that one should
not experience negative emotions. I remember my first training in ACT and was
honestly shocked to see the world presented this way. It was the opposite from
everything I had learned thus far.
As we mentioned previously, this is key when working with painful and scary
inner experiences. There are key opportunities in therapy where you can practice
the same ACT skills you are teaching your clients, modeling how to do this work
in the moment. As therapists we all have things that clients can say or do that
“hook” us, where we start responding inflexibly to the content of what is being
said, rather than focusing on the function and our treatment plan. For example,
each of us authors have had clients engage in an extended speech on political is-
sues that vary from our own beliefs. In our best moments as therapists we catch
our natural, inflexible reactions (to argue, to check out, or to wait for the rant to
stop) and instead reorient to the function (what is going on for the client, how
does this link to what we are working on, and what might I do to model and
elicit psychological flexibility). For example, we might shift a frustrated, fused
rant about politics by acknowledging the emotions and thoughts that are present,
reflecting how we notice our own minds getting caught up and fused with what is
right and wrong, and shifting to notice the process of our mind “doing its thing”
while considering what we want to focus on doing with the time we have.
The therapist has a lot of credibility, so what you say and how you act stands out
to the client. Therefore, you need to be present and prepared to notice when you get
caught up in psychological inflexibility and to shift to model psychological flexibility
throughout the session.
DISCLOSURE
Disclosure is an excellent way to teach and model psychological flexibility. I use

disclosure in almost every session. It is a great way to show that every verbal
human struggles with similar internal experiences; it is just that some of us
have more practice and skill responding to them in effective ways. It can be
really useful for a client to see that the therapist also experiences anxiety, de-
pression, and uncertainty. We might even not like experiencing those internal
experiences. Disclosure is also a valuable way to model flexibility for your
clients, describing what is coming up for you in the moment and how you are
responding flexibly.
Some of my practicum students struggle with disclosure, and I can see why.
Disclosure can sound like you are supposed to put out your dark secrets. I do not
43
think that is accurate. You need to be professional and ethical. If disclosures are in
the client’s best interest and are appropriate, they can be useful. Remember that,
like everything you do in therapy, the focus should be on the function you want
to have with clients, doing things that help your client become more psychologi-
cally flexible, in line with the case conceptualization and treatment goals. As it is
hard to provide rules on what level of disclosure is appropriate, we will offer a few
examples of generally appropriate levels of sharing.
T: I often feel quite frustrated when doing homework with my children. It

bothers me, as I wish I enjoyed the time with them but that is just not
how I feel.
T: As a professor I have lots of opportunities to lecture. I have different
levels of anxiety when lecturing. Sometimes it’s a 0 out of 10, and in the
past few years I have had some 9s out of 10. The thing that has surprised
me is the higher levels of anxiety are not all that predictable. I’ve spoken
to hundreds of people and had low anxiety, and I’ve spoken to 20 but a
look someone gave me set me off. It’s odd how anxiety works.
T: In my life there are emotions I have learned I should usually listen to and
emotions I usually don’t listen to. For example, if I see my wife and feel
love toward her I’ll usually say something. Nothing huge, but I’ll tell her
I love her, or I appreciate her. She always likes that. But when I am feeling
frustrated toward her, I have learned that in our relationship, that is not
the right time to say it. We do better discussing it later in the day, when
we are feeling less frustrated.
I hope you see that all three of these examples are pretty harmless; raising chil-
dren can feel frustrating, I experience anxiety at times when lecturing, and I feel
love for and frustration with my wife. I am pretty confident these emotions apply
to just about everyone on the planet. But putting them out there creates a context
in which we can discuss functional ways to respond to them.
We also encourage you to take opportunities to be appropriately bold in your
disclosures with clients. By bold we mean taking a measured risk to put out there
with your client a reaction you are having in the moment. By appropriate we mean
doing so in a way that is likely to have the function you want with your client,
based on the case conceptualization and treatment goals. When you notice your-
self having a strong internal reaction to your client or an urge to respond in-
flexibly (to over-explain, avoid a topic, argue), consider if it is an opportunity to
model and elicit psychological flexibility. One pattern we use is to state a thought
or feeling we are having in response to a client in a defused, accepting way; call out
the pull to respond inflexibly and the costs of that response; and orient ourselves
toward a flexible response instead.
T: I’m noticing right now that I have the urge to “save you” from this feeling
of anxiety. I want to reassure you that it’s going to be OK. And my mind
is telling me to “come up with a solution, quick.” But that would be doing
4
more of the same in a way, and the things you have been saying don’t
work and make you feel stuck. And I’m here to help you do something
different in your life. What if instead we just watched this anxiety and the
urge to make it go away? Just noticing it for what it is while we continue
the session.
These types of disclosures can feel bold, and this boldness can help break an in-
flexible pattern for yourself or your client. Small, safe disclosures can be useful; look
for opportunities to be appropriately bold in your disclosures to model flexibility.
Tip on how to remember what to go over in session
Please do not take this as a rule, but generally, when doing ACT, we do not have a
clipboard or notes on our laps. Maybe it is just tradition or weird rule-following,
but having a clipboard feels like there is something between the client and the
therapist. It sort of establishes that you, as the therapist, are in charge. It feels like
good modeling to sit there equally, with no materials between you and the client.
But I can see you asking, “How am I supposed to remember what to do?” I was
here once too, and I found that a bulleted list on a small sheet of paper was enough
to keep me on track. I would basically have a list of 5–10 words that reminded me
of where I was planning on going in the session. For example, you might have one
that looks like this:
• Check-in (homework)
• Willingness
• Two scales
• Little defusion
• Touch on values
• Behavioral commitment
• Homework sheet
If you need to remember what to do in a session, make a short list of bullet points
and set it on the table next to you.
Little language issues
As you get more talented in ACT you will find there are a handful of language
conventions that are common in lay language that support psychological inflexi-
bility. Because this is an introductory book, we will only present two of them, but
as you get more into this therapy, I am sure you will run into many more. Some
of these will sound awkward the first time you say them and they might not work
well in lay speech, but they can be helpful in teaching psychological flexibility.
45
Client experiences versus is an emotion

People often say, “I’m depressed,” or “I’m anxious,” or “I’m mad.” It is less common
to say one feels that way. But it makes a difference. If one is something then it is
really difficult to change that. If one is tall, or skinny, or from Wisconsin, then
those are generally stable. This is in contrast to something that changes from
hour to hour or day to day, like our inner experiences. I would never say I am
anxious in the same way that I am tall. But most people talk that way, and it
gives the experience of anxious permanence and power. Therefore, we prefer to
say experiencing anxiety, feeling sad, or noticing depressive thoughts. All these
ways of talking about inner experiences present them as events that the person
observes instead of is defined by. Talk about inner experiences as transitory rather
than stable.
Inner experiences are described objectively (e.g., big or small), not

subjectively (e.g., good or bad)
Just like the previous example, it is easy to fall into calling emotions good or bad,
even when we all know we do not really mean it that way. But these little slips
reinforce the notion that certain inner experiences are OK to have and others
are not. This is all conceptually pretty straightforward when we are talking about
anxiety, depression, or pain. We all know that life without these inner experiences
would not be functional. We suggest calling the internal experiences what they
are without the descriptors. The same goes for happiness, love, and other so-
called positive emotions—just call them by name rather than calling them good
emotions.
There are more complicated inner experiences, such as trauma memories, panic
attacks, gruesome obsessions, or chronic pain. These are inner experiences that
almost everyone would agree are disturbing, gross, or otherwise aversive. Even
then, it is important to use language that sounds more objective to describe them.
You might say, “thoughts that are more of a struggle for you,” or “thoughts that go
against who you are.” “Painful” seems like an OK way to describe a memory of a
trauma, but “bad” does not sound so good. You can even be straightforward with
the client about the situation:
T: How are you doing with the obsessions?

C: I can let them be there sometimes, and other times they overwhelm me—
they are just so disturbing.
T: Yes, I can understand. A thought about harming a loved one can really
grab you. Let’s make sure we are able to tell the difference between a
thought about harming a loved one and actually doing it. The act would
be disturbing, but what do you make of a thought about it?
Describe inner experiences as objectively as possible.

46
BUILDING YOUR COMPETENCE WITH ACT
This way of doing therapy can feel like a lot to absorb for those who are new to
ACT. The principles discussed here might fit broadly with your own views on
mental health and therapy, but they might also leave you unclear as to how to ac-
tually do this with clients and bring all of these principles to bear in the moment.
This is exactly why we wrote this book. The rest of this book will walk you through
a session-by-session protocol on how to actually go through a course of ACT with
a client. It takes time to learn how to embody these key ACT principles, and the
best way to learn is by doing it. We recommend reviewing this chapter a few times
as you continue working with clients. As you work with your clients, keep these
core principles in the back of your mind, looking for opportunities to practice
ACT as a way of doing therapy, rather than as just a set of techniques.
REFERENCE
47
Session 1
ACT Orientation and Creative Hopelessness
This session has two phases: (1) help the client orient to what occurs in therapy
in general and ACT specifically, and (2) implement the phase of ACT called cre-
ative hopelessness. The overarching aim of the session is to have the client start to
interact with their thoughts, feelings, and bodily sensations in a different way and
to start making choices based on what they care about rather than what they are
feeling. We need to set a new stage for therapy and life in order to do this. In par-
ticular, we believe establishing a strong foundation with creative hopelessness and
control as the problem (covered in Chapter 5) can make work later on in therapy
go a lot more smoothly.
Although this typically takes us a session, feel free to spend a couple sessions
with your client on this chapter, depending on how quickly they grasp these new
ideas. The same guideline is true for the chapters that follow. The session timeline
we outline is just a guide, and your clients may require more or less time. We rec-
ommend meeting your clients where they are at instead of trying to rush through
the content of these chapters. The findings from the ACT ADVISOR (Figure 2.2)
will help guide you as you work through this chapter and the later ones.
SETTING THE STAGE FOR THERAPY
1. Ask the client what they want from therapy
This is a relatively straightforward question that is often missed in therapy: “Why

are you here?” or “What do you want to get out of therapy?” Most professionals
know that the goal of therapy is to help clients live healthier and more meaningful
lives. Sometimes we equate that to being happy or free from certain “negative”
inner experiences, but if we think about it, we would say emotional regulation
is merely a means toward living a more meaningful life. Clients are less familiar
with this way of thinking. Clients, like all people, make up rules about ways to fix
48
things. Just like we have rules, clients will usually have some sort of rule that, once
certain inner experiences are reasonably controlled, life will be better. This is a
rule that is very difficult to follow and is really more like a rigged game. ACT takes
the stance—supported by data—that inner experiences are difficult to meaning-
fully control and that attempts to do so often cause more harm than good. Still,
clients will usually report they are in therapy to feel less depressed or anxious, to
be happy, or to feel good about themselves.
We need to help them look at this situation differently, by asking them, “What
will change in your life if you lessen that inner experience?” You want to know
what the client wants to be different in their life. Typical answers will be that they
will be happier, enjoy life more, and do things that have been difficult, such as
being more engaged with work, friends, and other meaningful activities. Now is
not the time to challenge the conceptualization that changing inner experience is
the key to changing the way one lives, but to gently suggest there are other ways to
think about it. In addition, you will establish that focusing on how one is living is
an important metric for a “good life.” The hope is to get the client somewhat ready
to start thinking about their situation a little differently. The following steps will
also help with that.
2. Ask the client about their understanding

of therapy: Get on the same page
You are trying to learn the client’s rules about therapy while simultaneously
teaching the client to hold these rules flexibly because they may not be accurate.
As described in the Chapter 1 of this book, a general goal of ACT is to vary (e.g.,
make it happen at some times but not at other times) the influence of language
on the actions of the client. Most clients have some level of knowledge of therapy.
Sometimes this knowledge will be really helpful to therapy and other times it will
not be. For example, if a client has a history with a compassionate and cooperative
therapist, there will likely be an expectation of that again. Whereas if the last ther-
apist gave a lot of instruction and taught skills counter to ACT, there will be ex-
pectations for similar therapy. There are even times when the client has no therapy
experience, and maybe what they know about it is from television. These are the
most interesting clients to ask, “What do you foresee happening in therapy?” We
have heard clients say things like, “Well I pictured myself lying down, with you
sitting behind me, and me talking about myself.” The following is an example of
how such a conversation might go:
Therapist (T): Please tell me what you think is going to happen in therapy.
Client (C): I don’t really understand the question.
T: Each client has their own history with therapy or their own expectations
of what therapy will be like. I’d like to know what you think we are going
to work on together and what you expect from therapy.
49
ACT Orientation and Creative Hopelessness49
C: OK. I have been in therapy before and we worked on decreasing my de-

pression. I found therapy to be helpful. My therapist generally helped me
see how I think about life as well as how I think about myself.
T: This is really useful. What is your goal in therapy?
C: To be less depressed.
T: What do you think of that goal?
C: Sounds good to me (laughs).
T: OK. And what do you think things will be like between you and me?
C: That’s an interesting question. I generally don’t think about that.
I guess I just figure that you are in charge and you’re going to teach me
what to do.
T: Thank you for sharing this information. I’ve found it really helpful. We
have a long road ahead of us and rather than mapping it all out before
we get started, I’d rather just tell you some basic things about how I do
therapy. First, while I do know a good amount about psychology, I see
us both as experts. You are an expert on how things work for you. But
a funny thing can happen in life: we can go about our days and there
are many things to learn, but we don’t see them. I have a sense of things
people miss or misinterpret. All I am going to do in therapy is help you
see some things that are already there but you are missing and offer you
some new options you can try out and see how they work for you.
3. Discuss what a “good” outcome is
The goal of this phase is to begin undermining the rule that the only “good” out-
come is less of a specific internal experience while offering the alternative rule
that “quality of life” might also be a good goal for therapy. Clients generally enter
therapy with the hope that the therapist can decrease whatever internal experi-
ence (e.g., anxiety, depression) is unpleasant for the client. This expectation is
likely based on rules clients hold. The first rule is that certain internal experiences
are bad. This is a rule that is almost unwritten in Western culture. However, most
people would agree that no internal experience is inherently problematic. Inner
experiences are only problems if they negatively affect people. The second rule
many clients have is that they can start working on quality of life once certain
internal events are lessened. Even though anxiety and depression cannot actu-
ally stop people from engaging in certain activities, clients follow rules that say
just that.
An ACT therapist generally does not directly challenge a rule, because that
would be replacing a rule the client did not learn via experience with another one
learned through society. We aim to create a space in which the client can learn to
hold rules flexibly and develop more functional ones based on their lives. Thus,
you need to have a conversation about whether thoughts, feelings, and emotions
are actually bad and whether they need to change.
50
T: What one thing about you needs to be different to make your life better?
C: I guess I need to handle my depression better. I need to know how to
control it better.
T: Why do you want to control your depression?
C: That is easy. If I did not feel this way so often I’d be able to live the way
I want, and be the type of person I want to be.
T: How hard is it to do what you want or need to do while feeling this way?
C: It’s very hard. It is hard to just feel this way but it’s especially hard to do
things while feeling this way.
T: If depression was gone, would life be easy?
C: Yes.
T: The first thing I would like you to do is recognize the feelings you are
having right now. That feeling of frustration and being overwhelmed
tells you something about your situation. Ask yourself: Have you been
working hard? And is it getting you to where you want to be? If the an-
swer is “no,” then maybe you are playing by unfair rules. Maybe the rule
that certain thoughts and feelings are inherently bad is wrong. People
seek out fear in movies, rides, and sports but despise fear when it is from
a trauma. The rule that you can do what you want in life once the feeling
is lessened may also be an inaccurate one. If you ever watch a play or
a musical, I bet you are seeing a whole bunch of people who feel quite
nervous or anxious and they perform quite well.
C: That seems like a lot. That seems really different.
T: I won’t tell you what to do. Instead, I will ask you to look at your experi-
ence and see what works well and what does not. If you notice things are
not working well, I can offer you other options. Tell me, how well are you
doing at controlling your depression?
C: Poorly.
T: Is that because you have not tried hard enough to control it?
C: I’ve tried really hard, actually.
T: Be honest. Has life improved or worsened as you have worked at this?
C: Honestly, things have been going downhill for a while.
T: OK. So maybe the rule about regulating depression is wrong in some
ways. Maybe you don’t have to control depression better to live a higher-
quality life, and we may need to rethink our rules about how you work.
C: OK.
T: But there is an important part here. This means our goals in therapy
might be more about how well you can handle your depression rather
than how much depression you feel. This makes a difference. When I ask
you, “How was your week?” I am asking, “What did you do? What per-
cent of the time did you do things you wanted to do? How much did you
let depression push you around?” I am not asking, “How much depres-
sion did you feel?”
C: Are you saying how much depression I feel does not matter?
51
T: It matters in a different way. It matters in the sense that it tells us how

hard you had to try or how much effort you had to put in to live the way
you want. It’s like driving to work on a sunny day or on a stormy day. We
might be interested in how long it takes you, but we would understand
that the drive on the stormy day will be more difficult and slower.
4. Improvement will not be linear
The goal is to challenge the rule that the client’s unwanted inner experience
will slowly decrease throughout therapy. As with previous conversations, we
are evaluating the utility of rules that are likely unworkable. The first unwork-
able rule is that the inner experience can easily be changed. Hopefully, that rule
got addressed a little in the last conversation. The second unworkable rule is that
gains are gradual and linear. People have experiences in life where they get out
what they put in. For example, if you work in your garden you can reasonably ex-
pect that it will slowly look better. Moreover, if you work all day it will look better
than if you work for a few hours. Events occur that are outside of our control.
Maybe the gardener will have a beautiful summer, or maybe rain will be scarce.
Our fear as therapists is that if the gains are more “up and down,” this pattern
will go against the client’s rule of what “good therapy” looks like. If it is viewed
as “not working” because changes are nonlinear, then there is a greater chance of
client dropout. We want the client to enter therapy with the rule that “gains will
be nonlinear” and “gains will be measured in terms of quality of life rather than
internal experiences.” This description is integrated with the next section.
5. Give therapy time to show it is helpful
This “new” approach to therapy will be confusing and even frustrating, change
will be slow, and positive change will be in quality of life rather than in emotions,
thoughts, or memories. Thus, it is wise to discuss giving therapy a reasonable
amount of time to show its utility. We typically explain these issues to clients and
ask them how long they think is reasonable to “give ACT a fair shot.” Sometimes
an analogy is useful, such as, “If you were to take up a new hobby, how much time
would you need to spend on it to know if you like it or not?” You can even ask
the client about learning new things and what that process is like. For example,
you might say, “There is something fun about hiking somewhere new, but I will
certainly be more prepared in terms of how much food and water to bring, how
sunny the trail is, what shoes are best, and how long it takes the second time I do
the hike. I may not even enjoy it that much the first time and have more fun the
second time. Some things take time and practice to really appreciate.”
Specifically ask the client this: “How many sessions do you think is fair to get a
sense of whether this therapy is useful or not? I’m asking you to give me a handful
of sessions so we don’t judge this impulsively. Just like I noted before, this process
52
will have ups and downs, and two sessions is not enough to get a sense of whether
this is helpful or not.” Any number in the four or greater range is good. That can
be presented as about a month to try this new therapy.
HELPING THE CLIENT SEE THAT CONTROLLING INNER

EXPERIENCES BACKFIRES: CREATIVE HOPELESSNESS
Creative hopelessness is an odd term for a phase of therapy. To give some his-
torical background, creative hopelessness was a term for the initial phase of
ACT when it was first developed. At that time, ACT already had a strong focus
on processes of change but was still adherent to some therapeutic procedures.
Creative hopelessness was one of the original procedures everyone learning
ACT knew how to do. If you purchase the original ACT book (Hayes, Strosahl,
& Wilson, 1999), you will see that Chapter 4 is on creative hopelessness. Creative
hopelessness is covered in books less so now than when ACT first started be-
cause we think it is more important to understand the six ACT processes of
change than to master specific techniques. We still think that is the case, but,
as written earlier, learning how to flexibly apply these six techniques can be too
hard a hurdle for some to overcome. We find creative hopelessness is a nice way
to get rolling with a client. In our experience, it goes smoothly a high percentage
of the time.
The goal of creative hopelessness is to help the client see the hopelessness of
regulating inner experiences and at the same time intuit a creative solution to
their problem by being open to a new way of approaching it. To be straightfor-
ward, you are guiding clients to contact their lived experiences that will typically
tell them the following: (1) inner events are difficult to control in a meaningful
way, (2) attempts at regulating the inner experience might be more problematic
than having the feeling itself, and (3) the only way out of this situation might
be to sidestep the whole thing—to take a completely different approach to the
problem: acceptance.
We have developed a way to teach this phase that is simple and generally works.
Part of the reason it seems to work is that we know the client has not been able to
control their inner experience and that attempts to do so impact quality of life. We
know this because the client is seeking therapy. If the client were able to meaning-
fully change their inner experience, then there probably would not be an issue on
which to work. If they were already practicing acceptance, then the inner experi-
ence would also not be a clinical issue.
We are not sure how to emphasize the importance of this next statement other
than to write it this way: This is really important. You must figure out what
the inner experience is that the client is struggling with! ACT makes a lot of
sense for you and the client if you know the internal experience that the client is
struggling with. For example, it may be anxiety in anxiety disorders, depression
53
in mood disorders, urges to use a substance in substance use disorders, pain in

pain disorders, urges to pull hair in trichotillomania, and so on. Remember, a core
concept in ACT is that people spend a lot of time and energy attempting to con-
trol particular inner experiences and not only do these attempts not work, they
come at a cost in terms of quality of life. In this exercise, you will walk the client
through all the ways in which they have tried to control their inner experiences,
see the effects of those attempts, and question whether this overall way of dealing
with the inner experience is wise.
The outline of the creative hopelessness exercise is as follows:
• Find the target inner experience.

• How long has the client struggled with this inner experience?
• What has the client done to control this inner experience?
• How well can it be controlled in the short term?
• How well can it be controlled in the long term?
• How is this really working for the client, based on their lived experience?
Find the target inner experience.
Did we mention that it is crucial you determine what the target inner experi-
ence is? This whole exercise rests on your knowing that. For every person for
whom psychological inflexibility is an issue, there is at least one inner experi-
ence that is problematic for them. Figure out what that is and find a term you
can use to talk about it. When working with anxiety, it will be anxiety, fear,
obsession, or some related term. When working with substance use or trichotil-
lomania, it will be urge. Finding a term your clients can relate to will help them
engage meaningfully in the exercise. You might ask, “What is the thought,
feeling, or sensation you struggle with?” (We are going to use anxiety as an
example in this section.) Once you nail down a term you can use throughout
therapy with the client, write on the whiteboard or a sheet of paper, “Can you
control anxiety?”
How long has your client struggled?
Ask, “How long have you struggled with this feeling?” Depending on the age of the
client, we might ask whether they struggled with this in grade school, high school,
college, in their 30s or 40s, and so on. The goal is to help the client see that this is
an old struggle. You might even ask them to think of all the ways this struggle has
shown up throughout their life. For example, the client might have been nervous
about social things in school, getting a job in college, relationships after that, and
now their career. Help your client grasp that this is a timeless struggle that has
likely shown up in various permutations.
54
What has your client done to control this inner

experience?
Next say, “I think it is important we get a sense of how anxiety works and how
much it is really under your control.” You can add, “I would like to let your ex-
perience teach us about how these things work.” Then, get a list of the ways your
client has tried to regulate, minimize, or otherwise escape or avoid anxiety (see
Box 4.1 for examples). You will notice there are overt avoidance behaviors, little
things people do in their heads, unhealthy moves like using substances, and even
healthy activities like yoga, exercise, and praying. While we have provided a list
of such behaviors in Box 4.1 as an example, it is important to avoid labeling
these things as “good” or “bad” with your client because we are more curious
about whether your client can successfully control anxiety. Be sure to get an ex-
haustive list so the client properly appreciates all their attempts to control inner
experiences.
How well does it work to control the inner experience?
Once that list is up, we will usually ask, “So what do you think?” We usually
get responses that the list is long or that a lot of time and energy go into those
Box 4.1 Example of List of Control Strategies

in Creative Hopeless Exercise
Control Strategies
Tell myself “It’s OK” S
Watch Netflix S
Talk to friends S
Do yoga S
Work out S
Drink alcohol S
Pray S
Take a deep breath S
Listen to music S
Go for a run S
Cry S
Vent S
Read a book S
Use Reddit S
Read Buzzfeed lists S
Use social media S
Isolating self S
Procrastinate S
s, short term.
5
strategies. Sometimes the client will wonder what they have missed or not tried
yet. Regardless, at this point, say, “This is a nice list. It looks a lot like other ones
I have seen. You have tried logical things. I only see reasonable moves up here.”
Tell the client you are curious how effective these moves are at regulating anxiety.
It is important that you indicate you are curious about how well these moves have
worked to control the inner experience. We are not asking if they are good life
moves. That is not the point of this exercise. After all, healthy moves may not al-
ways help to control emotion.
Short-term effectiveness
Tell the client you first want to look at whether these emotion-control strategies
are useful in the short term for regulating anxiety (or other inner experiences).
Short-term refers to a couple minutes or an hour or two. Remind the client that
many strategies work in the short term but their effects do not last. For ex-
ample, I might distract myself while at the dentist to ignore the discomfort of
having my teeth scraped. That is a short-term solution because I need to avoid
anxiety the next time I go. The move only worked in that moment. We will
walk through each move and decide whether the move gets rid of the anxiety
in the short term or if it gets rid of it for a long while. Do not focus on whether
the move is a good idea. Many control strategies can be healthy things, like
yoga or running, but are not effective long-term solutions for regulating inner
experience.
We often go through the list and add a little s after those that only work in the
short term. It usually ends up being most of the items on the list. Sometimes a
client will argue that one strategy works really well, is easy to do, or lasts a long
time. When that occurs we just agree and say, “Great, we are just looking at the
success of your strategies. Sounds good that you have one that works pretty well
for you.” But usually after going through all the strategies we will find all the moves
work fairly well in the short term but not longer than that.
Long-term effectiveness
Next, we say, “What we are really looking for are strategies that work for extended
periods of time. If you were to have a plumber fix a leaking pipe in your home,
how long would you like that repair to last?” Most of the time the answer is some-
thing like, “For the life of the home.” Then, we go through the list of strategies and
ask what has worked in the long run, by which we mean months or years. This
is obviously a bit of a trick question because nothing on the list will have worked
that long. If something had worked for that duration, the person would not be
seeking therapy. After you have gone through all the strategies and determined
none of them has worked in the long term, ask one final question.
56
How is this really working for you?
After creating this list, most clients feel some frustration or hopelessness. They see
a lot of work has gone into solving a problem without real success. It is kind to tell
the client that their attempts are reasonable and that they simply did what most
people do: They saw a problem and tried to fix it. Whereas this problem-solving
approach works for many things outside our skin (e.g., flat tire, lost car keys),
struggles under our skin (e.g., anxiety, depression, self-critical thoughts) seem to
work differently, so it is hard to find a clear path out of them. At the same time, it
is important to get a sense of how this is working for the client based on their real
experiences. Specifically, ask:
1. Is the inner experience getting easier or harder to deal with?

2. Are any of these strategies negatively affecting your life?
3. How long can you maintain this fight against your anxiety?
Usually clients report, over time, the inner experience has become a larger issue
in their lives. In fact, the more time they spend trying to fix it, the bigger it gets.
When going over how these strategies negatively affect their lives, there will usu-
ally be a few that cause problems. Clients spend a lot of time attempting to control
inner experience, and these attempts detract from time that could be spent on
more exciting or meaningful things. Also, some moves are objectively unhealthy.
For example, clients may use substances to regulate emotion, cut themselves,
avoid people who are meaningful to them, and so on. These are fairly obvious
moves. At the same time, do not forget there are also objectively healthy strategies,
such as therapy, meditation, or exercise, that fail to control the inner experience.
ALTERNATIVE TO CONTROL
Addressing creative hopelessness segues into a discussion on whether attempting

to control problematic inner experiences is a good idea for clients given every-
thing they have learned from their experiences thus far. We will often say, “After
looking at this, I have to wonder, what is the larger problem in your life: that you
experience anxiety or that you put this much effort into regulating it?” If the client
is unwilling to admit the attempts to control have been unsuccessful, then meet
them halfway: “Would you say these attempts at controlling your anxiety have not
worked well and have taken a fair amount of time and energy?” Once you feel you
and the client are on the same page, suggest an alternative way to solve this issue
that does not involve first controlling the inner experience.
We might say, “Most people come in here thinking their anxiety needs to be
controlled before they can start living their lives. But what if that isn’t totally ac-
curate? There are situations where we can change a thought or a feeling and it’s
fixed. For example, I might be frustrated with something someone said to me,
57
I tell them what they said frustrated me, and they respond, ‘Oh, sorry, that is not
how I meant it at all,’ and that changes the feeling. I’m no longer frustrated. But
certain things like anxiety about social situations work differently. With anxiety
you can’t just try harder and get it to change.” The following metaphor might help
clarify this issue.
Two-games metaphor
You can set this game up for any sport the client likes. I usually ask what some
of their favorite sports are to watch and adjust the metaphor to fit their interests.
Maybe it is more like this, there are two games you can play with regard to
your anxiety. The first game is the one you have been playing. It’s you and
four of your friends against five professional basketball players. The game is
played fairly; I mean, there are referees who are neutral. But the situation here
is you are playing to get rid of anxiety. You can work hard and do your best,
but you know your team has no shot at winning this game. Your opponents
are just way better than you. So you try, and maybe you make a shot every
once in a while, but all and all your team does terribly. That’s game one.
Game two is different. It is your team against another group of players
from your area who are matched with you in ability. This is a fair game. In
this game, if your team works hard, puts in a good effort, you will win a fair
amount of the time. But you have to put in a good effort to win. The difference
here is that you are playing for quality of life. You are not playing for more or
less anxiety. This can be hard for some people because game one—the game
focused on lessening anxiety—will still be going on. The other team will keep
playing and scoring. They will try and get you to play. But if you stop paying
attention to the game you are in, or send one person over there to try and
keep the score under control, you will lose at your current game. You don’t
get to play both games, and this is where you get to choose. With regard to
anxiety, you can either play to control your anxiety or play to have a higher
quality of life. I am sure you want both, but trying to have both is part of the
reason you are still struggling so much.
Most clients will say they are interested in trying game two but do not un-
derstand what that would look like. They might also say not controlling anxiety
is “easier said than done.” It is prudent to be validating when they say leaving
the inner experience alone is difficult: “Yes, I get that letting anxiety be feels like
you are not trying or giving up. But maybe this is like letting a baby cry itself to
sleep. It is hard, it hurts, it feels wrong, and it is the right move. It’s just not the
obvious move.”
So here is all I’m asking you to do this week, I would like you to pay atten-
tion to the pull to participate in game one and don’t give into it a few times.
58
For just a handful of times, let it stay there and continue on with what you
want to be doing with your life. Moving on is important. This is one place
where people get stuck. We need to practice living with anxiety. When anx-
iety shows up, practice allowing it to be present and continuing on with the
task you had hoped to do. Maybe you will choose to do a smaller version of
the task, and that is fine. Just keep moving your life along.
See “Session 1 homework.”
SESSION SUMMARY
In this session you should have learned what the client wants from therapy and
what they expect to happen. Using that information, you will have helped them
see that, from an ACT standpoint, you and the client are going to focus more
on changing behavior than on regulating thoughts, feelings, and emotions. As
this is likely different from what the client was originally expecting, you and the
client should have agreed to a reasonable duration of therapy to see if it is helpful
(again, helpful being that the client is living better instead of feeling better) and
determined that the client is aware that growth from therapy will be a bit like
a rollercoaster. Finally, discussion of creative hopelessness should have helped
the client appreciate the difficulty in controlling thoughts, feelings, and bodily
sensations; hopefully, this should shift their focus to regulating their actions in-
stead. This week’s homework focuses on helping the client see the consequences
of attempting to control inner experiences.
REFERENCE
59
Session 1 Homework
One thing you can do between now and our next session is to observe how you
play these games in your daily life. See if you can notice the ways you engage in
game one. Because you are not used to doing this, you might not have been aware
of all the things you do to moderate, regulate, or solve the issue you’re struggling
with: distraction, self-blame, talking yourself out of it, avoiding situations, and so
on. For ___ [add specific number; 3–5 times] of those times you notice the pull to
play game one, practice not listening or giving in to that urge. Just let it be there
while you keep doing what you were going to do. The idea is to start practicing
how to live your life even when difficult thoughts and feelings show up. Use the
following table to keep track of your practice.
What was the situation What did I do with What was it like to
where the urge to control/ the urge? (To make respond in this way?
regulate/avoid showed up? it consistent with
(To make this consistent with the heading to the
the question format in the right, which is a
rightmost column) question)
E.g.: My friend said something Just let it be there Hard to stay present
hurtful and I felt bad about and refocused on but I was more en-
myself. our conversation. gaged rather than in
my head.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
60
61
Session 2
Control as the Problem
This session is a continuation of what was introduced in the previous session on

creative hopelessness. We are still working to help the client see and feel the actual
consequences of focusing their time and energy on regulating an inner experi-
ence. To reiterate, while control may feel like the right or logical way to handle
anxiety (or any internal experience) and may even work to reduce unwanted
thoughts and feelings in the short term, in actuality, it probably does not lessen
the feeling for a sustained duration, makes it stronger, makes it more central in
life, and worsens quality of life. Because ACT is about helping clients move to-
ward their values, not prescribing a specific set of behaviors, it does not preclude
effective use of avoidance. That is, avoidance may sometimes be the “right” move
for clients, but they need to be able to discriminate when it is and when it is not.
We do not tell the client how life works for them. Instead, we want to walk them
through their experiences and help them see what is accurate, based on these
lived experiences. Again, if regulating the inner experience worked for them, they
would not be in therapy. Thus, you are safe guessing that regulating inner expe-
rience has the same effect for your client that it has had for all other clients with
whom we have worked.
REVIEW HOMEWORK
In the previous session you asked your client to attend to their urges to regu-
late inner experience and to resist them a few times over the past week. To open
this session, let the client generally describe what that was like. However, follow
up with questions to elicit specific information on what they learned about their
urges to avoid, regulate, or otherwise change their inner experience. Your client
has likely never paid much attention to that feeling, so they would not have noticed
how they interact with it, let alone tried to interact with it differently. Remember,
our verbal abilities allow us to follow descriptions of how the world works, even
62
if they do not accurately represent the way it works. We need the client to more
fully experience what is going on for them by being aware of what is showing up
and attending to thoughts and feelings, rather than denying or looking away from
them. Also, discuss with the client what it was like to not give in to anxiety or
other inner experiences. How long did the experience stay there? What did it feel
like? Was it a good, bad, or neutral experience? Did anything useful come from
not giving in? What was being “willing” like? After you and the client have a good
understanding of the client’s relationship with the target inner experience, follow
these next steps to help the client further appreciate their attempts to regulate
their inner experience.
CONTROL AS THE PROBLEM
The aim of this set of exercises is to introduce the alternative perspective that
attempting to regulate internal experience does more harm than good. We want
to move emotional control from an action the client works for or feels good
about to something a little more aversive and less rewarding. It is like believing a
large, sweet, caffeinated drink is a decent breakfast until someone tells you that
it contains over 500 calories and is mostly sugar. The next time you have the op-
portunity to order one, it might seem less appealing. Similarly, while attempts to
control inner experiences may have seemed like a good idea, learning new infor-
mation about these attempts may alter the client’s original assessment of control
strategies. Consequently, this new way of looking at the situation changes how
rewarding different actions will be for your client.
CONTROL DOES NOT WORK
We like to start with a small discussion about the idea of emotional control before
getting into client goals and have the client begin to contemplate the effectiveness
of control strategies. By effective we mean the following: Do control strategies re-
ally help to reduce or eliminate uncomfortable thoughts and feelings? And do
they move clients closer to the life they want? The following is a summary of how
we would describe it to a client. Note that it is laid out didactically here, as we have
omitted client responses; this conversation is typically more of a back-and-forth
dialogue than a lecture.
Last session, we looked at whether controlling your inner experiences was

an effective strategy. We made a nice long list of ways you have tried to reg-
ulate your anxiety. It seemed almost all of them were effective in the short
term—for seconds or minutes. None of them were effective in the long term.
If they were, you probably would not be seeing me. But maybe more impor-
tant, there were some negative results from trying to control so much. It is
taking your time and energy. We discussed how this feels like a struggle you
63
Control as the Problem63
might not be able to keep up for a long time—if you haven’t already, you
will probably burn out. Finally, we also identified ways of controlling, like
isolating yourself, that have been negatively affecting you. All of this leads
me to suggest it might be wise to try something different with those inner
experiences. Maybe controlling your anxiety is a larger issue than having lots
of it. I don’t blame you for doing what you have been doing. It makes a lot of
sense and is completely reasonable. It is what everyone does, including me.
In fact, I would be out of a job if people didn’t do this.
Let’s walk through some real-life examples.
Tell me situations where controlling thoughts, feelings, or sensations has
worked for you. By worked I mean you either successfully controlled them or
attempting to control them made your life better.
[Discuss times when control has worked, such as distracting for small, dif-
ficult events, being motivated by guilt to do the right thing, being motivated
by fear to prepare for an important event.]
Yes, when something works in certain situations, it makes sense to try
it in other situations. If I have fears about the safety of my vehicle, I get it
inspected. When the mechanic says everything is fine, I may no longer expe-
rience that fear. Similarly, I had a hand injury and worried I might need sur-
gery. When the doctor told me I should keep exercising with it but to “take it
easy,” that sure got rid of the worry.
Similarly, there are many other situations in life where we can control
things we do not like. Tell me about something you did not like about where
you currently live that you changed and are now happier with. For me, I did
not like mowing my front lawn or dealing with the weeds that were coming
up. So, my partner and I tore up the grass, added dirt mounts, planted lots
of water-wise plants, added a drip system, and filled it in with mulch. Now,
we have to do about one-tenth the work and spend one-tenth the money
on water.
[Discuss with the client things they disliked and were able to fix—even if
the fixing took a fair amount of work and time.]
There are many other examples in life. For instance, if you order some-
thing at a restaurant and there is a problem with it, what can you do? If you
have an event coming up and you need a certain outfit for it, how can you
handle that? If you have something that needs to be completed at work and
time is tight, how might you get it finished?
I can see how this might be confusing. In so many places in life, if you
don’t like something, you can change it. It might not be easy, but if you put
time into it, you can often change it. But what if our thoughts, feelings, and
bodily sensations work according to different rules? If you really look at your
experience, you will likely see it is way easier to change things outside your
body than inside. Let’s see some examples of this.
We typically use a few exercises to illustrate the difficulty of controlling inner

experiences. Together, they show the client that (1) we cannot turn off certain
64
feelings at will, (2) we cannot stop a thought from coming into our minds, (3) we
cannot turn on certain feelings at will, and (4) we can much more easily do an
overt behavior than feel or think something.
Don’t feel anxiety
The function of this exercise is to help the client experience how difficult it is
to control anxiety. Because the message we get from society, media, family, and
friends is, “You can and should control negative feelings,” many clients come in
believing this. Even when their experience tells them they cannot control anxiety,
the rules doled out by their environment can be more persuasive. Thus, we want
to make this idea explicit to clients by having them directly contact the difficulty
of controlling anxiety through the following exercise.
If you could have any item in the world (e.g., new car, bike, house), what
would you choose? It would be a gift—you don’t have to pay for it. [Get the
client’s answer.] Let’s pretend I could actually give that to you but you have to
do one thing for me. Here it is: Do not feel anxiety for 30 seconds. Let’s pre-
tend I have the magical ability to detect if you feel anxiety. I will know if your
emotional state changes—no matter how slightly. Just sit there for the next 30
seconds and don’t have anxiety. [Most clients will feel a small change.]
If the client says they did not feel any anxiety, you can ask them what it would
be like if they were asked to give a speech in front of a large audience or sing the
national anthem at a sporting event. The condition would be the same: Do not
feel anxiety.
Don’t think of . . .
We have already used anxiety as an example of an inner experience that is diffi-

cult to control. Next, we will use the example of a thought. For nearly all people,
they will think of whatever you say. There will be a few who say they can stop
thoughts. We suggest not arguing with them. On the one hand, it could be true.
On the other hand, these clients are probably not getting the point of the exercise
or believe thinking about something else counts as not having the first thought
(even though a comparison between the two thoughts is needed to ascertain the
“absence” of the first thought). Say:
Whatever thing I say next, I want you to not think of it. I’ll offer you the same
pretend deal: If you do not think of it, I’ll give you that item you would really
like. Ready? Don’t think of a [name whatever you like].
65
Sometimes there is something unique to the client or that the client finds funny.
All of our clients laugh when we do this exercise. They find it ridiculous. More im-
portant, they contact the difficulty of attempting to control a thought.
Create an emotion
We find this next step useful because many of our clients note lack of motiva-
tion as a barrier to behavior change. They say, “I could do it if I wasn’t so tired,”
“If I could just get motivated,” or “I just need to get some momentum going.”
What they are saying is, “If I feel a certain emotion, then I can make the change.”
We totally understand. There are many times in our lives when it is a lot easier
to engage in an activity because we are feeling rested, caught up, inspired, or
motivated. But as we all know, those emotion are not always there when we
would like them to be. Sometimes they are and that is great. However, often they
are not, and that is just the way it is. It is dangerous to wait for an emotion to
show up before changing behavior. You can illustrate this in many ways, but here
is how we like to cover this:
Therapist (T): Thus far, we have talked about stopping an emotion or

a thought, but what about creating an emotion? Do you think you
could make yourself fall in love with the next person you meet? For
example, if I asked you to go out into the hall and feel intense love to-
ward the next person you see, could you do it? [Clients always say no.]
Why not?
Client (C): That is something that builds, based on interactions with the
person. Maybe I could feel attraction, but not love.
T: Fair. That seems reasonable. Maybe feeling motivated to make the
changes we are talking about in this session works the same way. It’s like
when I have to write a paper or prepare a lecture, I’m never particularly
excited to get started—especially on a new project—but once I get rolling
I can feel my motivation go up. I start getting into the activity. But which
came first: the emotion or action?
C: You did it and then the emotion followed.
T: OK. I think we are on the same page.
Overt behavior
Again, 99% of clients will agree that anxiety and similar inner experiences are
difficult to meaningfully control. It is nice to contrast this with something incred-
ibly easy to control: an overt behavior. Asking the client to refrain from touching
something in the room for the next minute provides a nice contrast to trying to
6
refrain from thinking or feeling a certain way. We will usually say something like
the following:
Would you agree, trying to control what you think, what emotions you feel,
or trying to bring on a certain feeling is pretty difficult? [Allow answer.] I’d
like to contrast those actions with another one. See if you can not touch this
tissue box for the next minute. [Client will usually laugh.] Are you confi-
dent you can keep your hands away from it for the next minute? Controlling
things that occur within our bodies is quite different from controlling things
that occur outside our bodies.
PULLING IT ALL TOGETHER
After your client has grasped the challenge of attempting to create or regulate
internal experiences and contrasted that with the simplicity of regulating overt
actions, you may pull all this together for your client. Rather than explaining it all
here, read how we would say it to a client.
T: I presented four things I wanted you to accomplish. I asked you to not

feel an emotion. Then, I asked you to not think of something I named.
Then, I asked you to create an emotion. In all situations you failed and
even laughed at the request sometimes.
C: Yes.
T: But it was easy to not engage in the overt action.
C: Correct.
T: I’m not picking on you here. Every person I see does the same thing, but
you found it ridiculous for me to ask you to control those things. Your
laugh was like, “Nobody could do this.” But you did come into therapy
specifically asking me to help you regulate your anxiety and fearful
thoughts and, in some way, help you feel motivated to do this. I wonder
if our culture has taught us that anxiety can and should be controlled
and there is something wrong with you if you cannot accomplish this.
But when we look at it together in this room, controlling thoughts and
feelings and creating motivation are actually exceedingly difficult. What
if that is really the way things work?
C: Then what are we supposed to do here?
T: Do you remember how easy it was to control your actions? Maybe it
is more about changing what you do than about changing what you
feel or think. This is an age-old discussion in psychology: Do your
thoughts and feelings cause your behavior, or do your behaviors cause
your thoughts and feelings? You can guess which side of that debate
I fall on.
67
WHY ARE PEOPLE SO FOCUSED ON CONTROL?
In an attempt to undermine the rule that thoughts and feelings need to be

regulated in order to live a healthy life, discuss with your client what led them to
believe inner experiences are bad and need to be controlled. Every client has a dif-
ferent past that led them to believe this area of life needs to be controlled.
Helping the client become aware of the function of those societal institutions
or particular people will hopefully alter their effect on the client outside of the
session. This is because exploring sources that have instilled in clients a habit of
emotional control may undermine the influence of those sources by beginning to
question their premise.
It is like following the rule that you cannot swim for at least 3 hours after a
meal but not being able to explain why you do so until someone explicitly asks
about it. Then, you realize the only reason is, “because my parents told me not
to,” and your behavior is not actually based on reading reports or learning from
almost drowning. That is what we are hoping for: We want the client to view
suggestions about emotional control more skeptically. Furthermore, this discus-
sion normalizes our adherence to emotional control: All of us do it because we
have been taught to do so by the world around us. The following are common
sources from which people learn about emotional control. Ask the client what
these groups have taught them about emotional control
1. Family (parents, siblings, grandparents, spouses, etc.)

2. Media (e.g., TV, news reporting)
3. Medical professionals and advertisements for medication
4. Friends
5. Past therapists
As this conversation wraps up, remind the client, “Maybe your biggest problem
is not the inner experience but how hard you try to control it.” The conversation
might go like this:
T: Can you think of times in your life when people taught you certain
thoughts or feelings are bad?
C: There are a couple that stand out to me. Both involved getting hurt. In
one situation, I tripped and fell down the stairs. It knocked the wind out
of me. My dad said, “You’re fine. Get up and get ready for school.” I re-
member being really confused. And this happened lots of times. I’d get
hurt, and instead of a hug or checking on me I was told, “You’re fine.”
T: Those are solid examples. How about from other people? Maybe
examples from people you consider really caring and nurturing?
C: My mom is a very caring person, but she certainly hates to see me sad or
upset. She would pretty much do anything to keep me from feeling sad. It’s
really sweet in a way, but she sacrificed a lot so that we could feel “positive.”
68
T: Neat. And what about society?

C: I don’t know.
T: I mean restaurants, businesses, drug companies, and so on. Do you have
any thoughts about other areas that are less personal?
C: Drug companies are pretty clearly out there to help us regulate. I do get a
kick out of advertising and the way they show happy people doing every-
thing. I’m always thinking, “I’ve never seen someone who looks and acts
like that in my life!”
T: This is fun. I just wanted you to get a sense of the world we are living in.
It’s pretty clear, the things we are working on in here don’t really match
with some of the things taught in the outside world.
Remind clients it is not their fault
We like to provide context for why someone might get into this pattern of action. It
makes sense that someone would believe they can control their inner experiences
when so many people and institutions tell them they can, when control works
so well in other areas of life, when there are times emotional control does work,
or when they do not quite appreciate the limited success of short-term control
strategies. Talk to your client about their context, using language as follows.
I just want to chat with you a little bit about why people get into these
situations where they work so hard to regulate an inner experience. There are
many reasons. A main one is what we just discussed. People and groups we
trust and respect have led us to believe we can and should regulate thoughts
and feelings we don’t like. For example, if I tell my wife I am feeling frus-
trated with something at work, she will try to make me feel better. She will
ask me what is going on, offer solutions on how to solve it, or give me other
ways to look at the situation. If I told my mom I was nervous about asking
my boss for a raise, I am sure she would say something like, “Well, I am sure
you will be kind and professional when asking. What’s the worst that can
happen? I also think you are doing a great job and likely deserve it.” These
are very kind things to say, but they suggest on some level that I need to feel
something other than frustration or anxiety, that frustration and anxiety are
“bad” states. It would almost be weird if my wife said, “Yes, work can really be
frustrating. How is it to feel frustrated?” Or if she said, “I bet those are very
interesting emotions you feel in that situation. Let’s talk about them.”
Also, in so many other situations in life, if you don’t like something, you
can change it. For example, when my hair grows too long, what do you think
I do? If I had a lot of weeds growing in my flowerbeds, what can I do about
it? If the paint was peeling off my house, what should I do? But if we go back
to my examples earlier, if I was feeling nervous about asking my boss for a
raise, what easy solution do I have? Maybe because we can so easily regulate
69
things outside our bodies, we don’t realize the same strategies don’t work as
well with things inside our bodies.
It also gets complicated because we are sometimes able to control what happens
inside our bodies. For example, if I am frustrated with my children, I might ask my
wife if she can be in charge for a bit and then go do something else. Ten minutes
later, I feel less frustrated. Similarly, when I am at the dentist, they have a televi-
sion on the ceiling so I can watch it while they are cleaning my teeth and it is a nice
distraction from the scraping. I distract myself most of the way through my dental
appointments and it makes them easier to get through. Maybe emotional control
works well briefly in relatively unimportant situations, but when we really get into
more intense emotions, like with an anxiety disorder, they are out of our control.
Control might be one of those things that only works well in certain situations, and
we have to pay attention to what those situations are.
OFFER ACCEPTANCE AS AN ALTERNATIVE
There has been a lot of discussion on what the definition of acceptance is. The
actual definition is in Chapter 1, but it seems worth offering a working defini-
tion for you and the client. Acceptance is finding a place within where all inner
experiences can exist. There are two important parts to think about. First, accept-
ance is not just for the “negative” inner experiences—we practice acceptance of
all inner experiences; it is just easier with “positive” ones. Second, acceptance is
not a means to regulate emotions; acceptance of all inner experiences is the goal.
Scholars have talked about tolerance as a means to eventual reductions in un-
pleasant inner experiences. In contrast to acceptance, tolerance describes a more
reluctant or begrudging stance toward inner experiences; in many ways, it is con-
ditional. If clients say, “I can accept feeling anxious if it goes away after a period
of time” or “I can make room for anxiety if it will go away in the long-run,” they
are referring to tolerance. Acceptance as we mean it is unconditional. It is about
genuinely welcoming difficult thoughts and feelings into your life even if you do
not like them, just as you would love your pet even if they chewed up your fa-
vorite shoes. Clients can define the parameters of the situation in which the inner
experiences show up, but they cannot restrict what and how much shows up if
they are practicing acceptance. Moreover, while there is certainly evidence for the
short-term effectiveness of tolerance, there is also notable evidence that while cer-
tain inner experiences may diminish, they never go away. There is no unlearning,
only new learning. Thus, fears, anxieties, thoughts, and memories may fade, but
they return under certain circumstances. They may not be as large or as powerful,
but for some people merely experiencing them again means failure.
The idea of acceptance as an end in itself may be obvious once we think about
it but less obvious in our day-to-day lives. We have tens of thousands of thoughts
a day. We would argue, people do nothing with the vast majority of them. Even
writing this, random thoughts about food, time, responsibilities, cleaning, and
70
other things have shown up and I (M.P.T.) have done nothing with any of those.
I sort of noticed that they occurred and refocused on writing. But with each one,
I had a moment when I could choose to do something about them. I could have
found something to eat, started getting ready for my next appointment, worked
on other things, or cleaned my office. These were relatively unimportant thoughts
to me, so they were pretty easy to let them be, though it might have been more dif-
ficult to let a more meaningful thought just be. We also have those really powerful
or scary thoughts that feel impossible to just let be there. We feel like something
needs to be done about them. What is important is, with practice, we get better at
letting any thought just be there. Letting thoughts be can become second nature,
even with very difficult thoughts. Here is how we like to introduce this idea to a
client:
I think you have tried really hard to deal with your situation and you have
done the best you can with the way things work. I’d give you an A for effort.
But what if we could move that effort over to something else that works a lot
better? Here is a small but odd example of what I am getting at. You know I’m
an academic, right? So writing papers is a big part of my job. When I started
graduate school, I did not know how to type. I stared at the keyboard and
found one key at a time. I’d argue that I tried really hard to type my papers.
Then one day, I decided I just needed to learn to type and looked up how
to online. I typed even more slowly for a month or two, using the correct
method before I was back at my original speed. Now, 15 years later, I’m prob-
ably four times faster because I taught myself that. I had to take a few steps
backward in terms of speed, but the lifelong benefit has been huge.
What if we are in a similar situation here? I see you’ve put a lot of effort
into your issue but I think you are doing it in an ineffective way—or at least
not the most effective way. I can show you a new way. It will be difficult, you
will feel clumsy, and it will feel like your old way is easier. All this is true. You
will be better at your old way of handling it, but your old way is likely not the
most effective long-term strategy.
If trying really hard to regulate your unwanted inner experience has gotten
you to this place, then it is possible a totally different strategy might make
sense. I’ve been at this for a long time, and very few people come to this con-
clusion on their own. I think that is partly why so many people struggle with
difficult thoughts and feelings and why psychologists stay in business: be-
cause what is helpful seems illogical.
Let me demonstrate with an example. [Take a small piece of paper and
have the client write on it the inner experience they are struggling with.
Then, ask the client to hold up one hand. Put the paper between your hand
and theirs. Then push. Ask the client to try and keep that inner experience
away from them. Keep pushing. Remind them how important it is to keep it
away from them.]
How much work is this? Are you getting a little tired? Do you think you
could do this all day? Doesn’t this feel a little similar to what you are already
71
doing, working really hard to keep this thing away? [Ask the client to stop
pushing. Gather the card and ask the client to just sit there and do nothing.
Toss the card on the client’s lap. It should be just sitting on the client’s lap.]
In both situations, the card was touching you. Which one requires more
work? Maybe we could interact with your inner experience in this way. We
could be in contact with the feeling and not do anything about it. If you are
willing to take this a step further, I suggest taking that piece of paper, folding
it up, and putting it in your pocket. You will carry it around all day like you
do with other inner experiences. Sometimes you will bump into it and other
times you will forget about it. When you take it out tonight, don’t throw it
away. Maybe put it back in your pocket tomorrow.
Practicing willingness
Although we are teaching acceptance in this phase, the term acceptance has a lot
of baggage. Thus, we use the term willingness with clients. Acceptance connotes
tolerance or resignation to most people. They also confuse it with accepting how
things are in the world, which is not necessarily what we are advocating. We actu-
ally teach that things in the world are more changeable than things within oneself.
Specifically, we want to empower clients to change things within their control
(e.g., behaviors) in the presence of internal barriers outside of their control (e.g.,
fear)—not to live life passively. We would say the following:
Allowing that thought, feeling, or bodily sensation to be present without

trying to change or control it is what I call willingness. It means making a
choice to allow something to be there. It is an action—something you do. It
is not an attitude or an emotional stance. Your emotions and thoughts might
be all over the place, but you get to choose how to treat those emotions. You
can choose to be kind to them, find a way for them to be there, or find a way
for them to come and go. I like to think of them as annoying houseguests or
coworkers. You don’t have to like the person to be nice to them. You might
even hate the person and you can be polite to them if doing so is consistent
with the kind of person you want to be. These emotions and thoughts are
kind of like that. They will show up, you may dislike them, and you can be
kind to them and allow them to have a home within you if that helps you
pursue the life you want for yourself.
Distinguishing between liking and allowing
Sometimes, the internal event that the client is struggling with is disturbing. An
emotion like depression or worry about finances may not be that objectively dis-
turbing, but a traumatic memory or an obsession about violence toward loved
72
ones—as in OCD—might feel different to your client. In these circumstances it is

worth discussing what you are asking the client to accept. You are asking the client
to accept thoughts, feelings, memories, and bodily sensations—not the occur-
rence of trauma or acts of violence. They are struggling with unwanted thoughts
about these things, and thoughts about events are different from the actual events.
This is still not easy to practice, especially when clients have bought into the con-
tent of these thoughts because the thoughts feel as real as the events themselves. It
is important for you as a therapist to appreciate the hard work your client is doing,
even if you can see these thoughts as just thoughts. Here is how we might say this
using a traumatic memory as an example.
I have an uncomfortable feeling about asking you to allow thoughts about

that car wreck to be there. I can’t imagine how difficult it is to have that
memory. And I also know offering to really make that thought go away or be
different is not fair, because we both know that’s not possible. That is not how
these types of thoughts work; your experience tells you this. These thoughts
don’t just go away, so we need to find a way for them to show up without
knocking us off course or ruining our day. First, let’s notice what this expe-
rience is: the memory of the trauma, pictures of the trauma that show up in
your head. We are not talking about the actual trauma. Could you notice
these memories as images floating by in your mind? When you stop trying
to push them out, can you notice what they can actually do to you? Do these
images really have the power to stop you from living your life? Do you want
your life to be controlled by these images? What has been the cost of your
running? What have you given up in life to avoid these images? Has it been
worth it?
Acceptance is a choice
Acceptance is something we choose to do. It is a way of responding to real or

anticipated internal events. Our clients might not want to be willing. They may
not feel motivated to act that way. That is OK, because being willing is an action,
and we can choose to engage in most actions regardless of whether we feel like it.
Moreover, like many actions, we may not be that good at accepting the first time
we try it. The more we work at it, the better at it we get. In addition, a little guid-
ance from an expert can help us do it better. We like to use the example of a coach.
Here is what we might say to a client:
Being willing is something you do. It is an action. This is good, because we

can engage in actions no matter what we are feeling. Some days we have lots
of energy and some day we don’t. Regardless, we can work on being more
willing every day. Like most new things we do, we will not be good at it
at first. Give me an example of something you are learning or just learned.
[Discuss with the client the process of getting better at things over time.] Yes,
73
just like that, I expect you to struggle mightily at first, but over time I bet you
will get better and better at this. I like to think of this like when I learned
how to kick a soccer ball. I remember kicking and getting better and better.
Then my brother, who is actually good at soccer, started to give me some tips.
I started being able to control where the ball went. The ball moved faster.
I eventually learned how to make the ball bend. I am not sure I would have
figured out those more advanced things accidentally. I think I needed some
expert guidance to really get that good. So maybe our work will be like that.
There is a skill you can learn, it will take a while, and I will be coaching you.
DOING IT
Every session from now on, we will practice the area(s) of psychological flexibility
discussed in session. These behavioral commitments have two purposes: (1) to
pursue valued activities and (2) to practice psychological flexibility in real-world
situations. It is important to help the client be aware of each area of growth as
they move forward. Sometimes the client will be more caught up in the enjoy-
ment of meaningful action. But when that engagement is not there, ask the client
to focus on practicing psychological flexibility. For example, if I was at a boring
talk I thought would be helpful but was not, I could use the time to practice being
present and not getting caught up in my negative thoughts about the lecture. We
are early in discussion of the six ACT processes of change, but we are already
working on acceptance and have touched on defusion. Values and behavioral
commitments are easy to introduce in the exercise described next. We are going
to build on this behavioral commitment at each session, but because this is the
first one, we will start simply.
Work with the client to find a small behavior change they can practice a few
times over the next week. We describe homework in more detail at the end of the
chapter. In addition, it might be helpful to preemptively identify possible internal
barriers that might show up: anxiety, laziness, thoughts of “this is too hard.” The
idea is to set clients up for success as much as possible. Note that these behaviors
should serve as progressive steps toward a larger pattern of valued living, and the
ultimate goal is for clients to engage in a meaningful network of actions. The idea
is once clients start doing things that matter to them, they will encounter the in-
trinsically rewarding elements of living a life consistent with their chosen values
and be able to elaborate on these actions in a sustainable way.
Motivational description for client
This basic exercise can be adapted to just about any client. Every client has some-
thing they have worked toward, so alter this exercise to fit their situation. For ex-
ample, if you are at a college counseling center, use college. If you are associated
74
with the military, use engagement in the military. If you are a religious counselor,
build on aspects of engaging with your religion. We are going to use college as that
is where we work.
You came in here because some inner experience is getting in the way. I am
hoping to work with you to learn how to handle it differently—hopefully,
more effectively. Let’s use something important to you as an example. Would
you say graduating from college is important to you? Graduating from col-
lege is a long haul. There is a lot to learn about many different topics—not
just classes but studying, making friends, extracurricular activities, how
much to study and what to study, and the list goes on. Building skills in each
of these areas will help the whole thing. But there are some general skills that
will help across all these aspects of college. I think of the work we do in ses-
sion as working on the general skills that are helpful everywhere in college,
and the specific exercises you pick each week apply to individual activities.
No one thing you will work on in college will cause you to graduate, but each
thing you get better at will contribute to your graduation. Each week, we will
work on a little thing that will help with your life, and as we put all these skills
together, you will get closer to your goal.
WRAP UP WITH HOMEWORK: WEEKLY

BEHAVIORAL COMMITMENT
Each week, you will have the client engage in one behavioral commitment. This
is one of the six processes of change. The actual commitment will vary depending
on the client, how far along they are in therapy, and what their main presenting
problem is. These commitments can occur multiple times a day (e.g., eat more
fruits and vegetables), daily (e.g., smoke 15 cigarettes a day instead of 20), or
weekly (e.g., interact with a particular person). They can even be on a different
schedule, such as to pull zero hairs for three full days over the next week for a
client diagnosed with trichotillomania. We are not going to specify actual behav-
ioral commitments because every client requires individualized behavior change
exercises. Most lines of work have already developed behavior change procedures.
Think of ACT as making it more likely that behavior change will occur. In line with
this aim, there are a few points to consider when setting behavioral commitments
in ACT more broadly:
1. The behavior(s) should be concrete. There should be no question as to

whether it occurred or not. For example, “be more social” is too vague.
Instead you might work with your client to define the behavior as “agree
to one social interaction a day that involves at least three sentences
spoken.”
75
2. There should be a very high chance the behavior will occur. We like
to say we want a 90% chance it will occur. If it is not at 90% chance of
occurring, make it easier.
3. The behavioral commitments are based on how difficult the person
finds the task; they are not based solely on how much emotion the
event creates. They are more a gauge of how big a step the client can
successfully make.
4. The amount of emotion that occurs during the behavioral commitment
is secondary. We engage in the event and then look back and see what
the event was like. When a client practices acceptance and defusion,
events that normally create a lot of emotion might no longer have that
effect. Similarly, events that do not typically create emotion may create
quite a lot.
5. The action should be tied to clients’ values in some way. Sometimes the
link is very clear (e.g., inviting a friend to hang out for the value of social
connection) and other times the client will just practice to build skills
that will help them follow their values in the future.
6. The homework should allow for practice of a specific process of change
during the behavioral commitment. The process of change you are
targeting should be made explicit for your client. Hence, in framing
the homework, state what skill the client should be attending to as they
engage in the valued action. For example: “As you talk to your friend this
week, I want you to just notice the feelings of annoyance or frustration,
notice where they show up in your body, and what they feel like. Practice
simply observing them without listening to them, and acting kindly
toward your friend.”
7. Allow for flexibility in the specific behavioral commitment. The broader
goal is for the client to practice certain skills and move toward their
values. Therefore, if the client’s original behavioral commitment is to
go for a hike, but it rains, they can watch a nature documentary (if the
value is connecting with nature) or go to the gym (if the value is physical
health) instead.
Here is some language you can use to describe this.
To provide some structure, we will be using this worksheet (refer to

Behavioral Commitment Worksheet, Appendix C) to track your behavioral
commitments every week. You’ll see from this worksheet that we don’t care
just about what action you’re committing to but also why you’re doing it,
what skills you’re building, and how you’ll navigate barriers that might
show up. We’ll also identify ways to set yourself up for success, like setting
reminders or having accountability buddies. So, what would be an important
or meaningful action you could realistically work on this week? Remember,
we want the chance of your successfully completing the action to be around
90%. We think of this as taking a step toward your larger goals.
76
SESSION SUMMARY
By the end of this session, you and your client should be on the same page about
the long-term ineffectiveness of control strategies and the consequences of exces-
sively using them. In addition, your client should have a working understanding
of willingness so they can begin practicing this skill as part of their homework.
You will have walked them through experiential exercises and metaphors about
acceptance. At the end of the session, you and your client should have decided on
homework they will be doing over the next week.
7
Sessions 3 and 4
Acceptance Supported by Defusion
Thus far, you should have spent time helping your client understand three
things: (1) inner experiences are hard to control and attempting to do so may ac-
tually exacerbate the struggle; (2) it is normal to try and control inner experiences
because there is a lot of social pressure to do so and control works in many other
situations; and (3) willingness to let inner experiences simply be there could be a
useful way to handle them, because willingness allows one to pursue what is im-
portant to them without needing to first change something inside them. Complete
the ACT ADVISOR (see Figure 2.2) again to see where they are on the six ACT
processes of change. If you and your client are not on the same page, go over
the processes again experientially. Do not tell the client what they should think.
Instead, walk through the basic material from the first two sessions again before
going back to acceptance, using key exercises and metaphors. Your job is not to
convince the client, and watch for the urge to over-explain or argue. Many clients
easily shift back into old patterns, and hearing this information again helps it to
sink in, particularly if they can connect it with their own personal experience and
what has worked and not worked in their life.
GREETING THE CLIENT
Most of us naturally ask our clients, “How are you?” or “How was your week?” at
the start of our sessions. There is nothing wrong with these questions per se. The
issue is you will usually get an answer that has something to do with how they
felt that week. It would be natural for a client to say something like, “Pretty good;
I was not that anxious” or “It was a rough week; my anxiety was high.” An answer
like this tells you the client is still not on board with how ACT conceptualizes
inner experiences. If the client answers in this way, they still believe happiness
is the lack of particular inner experiences. This is a dangerous stance to have be-
cause your client’s inner experiences are going to fluctuate throughout life. If the
78
client answers in this fashion, it is a great opportunity to discuss their stance to-
ward inner experiences, which might go something like the following:
I want to discuss something with you. I asked you how your week went and
you told me about your anxiety levels. Why did you focus on that?
Tell me about how you see your anxiety levels playing into whether you
had a good week or not.
If we go back to some of the conversations we’ve had, we were talking
about the effects of attempting to control or regulate your anxiety. Have you
been successful at that?
Many of us believe we can only do the things we want in life when anxiety
is below a certain threshold. Heck, that is what pretty much everyone in the
world has been saying to us. But what if that model is wrong? What if we
first do the things we want in life and our inner experiences follow? If the
situation is scary, we will feel scared. If it’s fun, we’ll feel excited. If there is a
chance of things going wrong, we will feel anxiety. The emotion comes after
the action, and people generally find they have a lot more control over what
they do than what they feel. So let’s talk about what you did this week. This is
partly my fault with how I worded the question. I will start asking you how
engaged you were this week, and you can tell me what you did and what you
worked on. I would like to hear about your successes and failures—in terms
of the things you did rather than what you felt. With that in mind, what did
you work on this week?
Now it is up to you to ask questions at the opening of the session that have more
to do with what the client has worked on over the week and less on how they felt.
We think this type of conversation is useful because it frames the way the client
looks at things. Remember: You are one of the few people in your client’s life who
sees things like this, and you need to keep reinforcing that viewpoint every chance
you get—you are up against many people who are teaching otherwise.
REVIEW HOMEWORK
In the last session, you asked the client to agree to a set number of behavioral
commitments tied to their values. They were not huge commitments. We wanted
the commitments to be linked to the client’s values so there would be some moti-
vation to make these changes and so the client could experience the life benefits
from engaging in meaningful actions. We also want the client to practice building
psychological flexibility. Thus, when discussing the homework with the client,
focus on these two things: (1) “How was it to do things you care about?” and
(2) “Psychologically (or internally), what was it like to try and make these changes?”
Do not try to convince the client it was wonderful to follow their values. It might
not have been all that great. We want the client to come into contact with the
79
Acceptance Supported by Defusion79
effects of their actions so their behavior can be shaped by their actual experiences
rather than by rules about how things should work. Before starting therapy, much
of their behavior was likely about emotional avoidance. We want them to contact
the effects of engaging in life. Sometimes this will be really fun and other times
it will not. Your openness will allow them to feel free to try things and give you
honest reports. Thus, if they can honestly say actions tied to their values were not
all that great, that is good to know. Try something different the next week because
if they do not connect with the purpose of the behavioral commitment, they will
not maintain behavior change.
Hopefully, as you move along through the course of ACT, the client will start
to see the value of being more psychologically flexible. Not only will it allow the
client to engage in new actions that are important to them, but they should also
be more comfortable in their day-to-day actions. Remember, building values
and behavioral commitments will make acceptance and defusion easier and
more meaningful. Similarly, stronger skills with acceptance and defusion will
allow the client to engage more and more comfortably with whatever they are
working on.
A TIP FOR DOING ACT: BE EXPERIENTIAL
ACT is supposed to be an experiential therapy. The concepts and lessons from

ACT are taught more effectively with real-life situations. They can be events from
the past week, things from a while ago, or events happening in session. Rather than
using a hypothetical situation to teach a concept, use a recent event with some
emotion still tied to it. I like to joke, “There is a reason there is a tissue box in every
therapy room: because talking about sad events causes us to feel the emotions
from that event.” It is an interesting line to say, because it may help the client re-
frain from judging themselves for having a particular emotion. It also highlights
that talking about emotion-laden events will likely result in experiencing those
emotions in session.
The reason we are bringing this up is that the client will likely describe events
from the week that went well or poorly. In both situations, there are opportunities
to talk about emotions that were present and how the client dealt with them. If
you handle this well and spend some time talking about the events and what they
were like, the client will experience some emotion that was present during the
events. This is useful because it either makes the discussion about how they han-
dled that emotion more real or provides an experiential opportunity to talk about
these issues. You can sometimes take these conversations further experientially
by also exploring with clients what it is like to discuss these issues with you right
now, shifting the focus to what is happening right now in the room and in rela-
tion to your interactions with each other. As you get more comfortable with ACT,
you can jump into it whenever it occurs. For now, save these events in your mind
and use them when you are having a discussion later. Here is just a quick example
80
of what we are getting at. In the following example, the client and therapist are
discussing acceptance.
Therapist (T): Could we spend a few minutes on how you are dealing with
these self-critical thoughts? I think there might be a way to make them a
little easier on you. Tell me again about the struggle you were having at
work this week with your new coworker.
Client (C): Yes. He’s new and young. Which is great because there is a lot of
energy, but he also talks down to me. He explains things I already know,
and if I try and interrupt him to say I understand this topic already, he
just keeps going because he says this is different.
T: This is a really helpful example. Tell me more about it.
C: OK, it gets my self-critical thoughts going. I wonder why he automati-
cally perceives me this way. I wonder why I can’t tell him to stop. I wish
someone would ask for my advice or opinion at some point.
T: How does all this make you feel?
C: It makes me feel frustrated with myself.
T: What else?
If the therapist continued to dig deeper and discuss this, the client would likely
start to feel the emotions they are struggling with. Two more minutes on this topic
and the client would really feel it.
T: Do you feel that way now?

C: Yes, I am putting myself down for being stuck on this. I’m like, why
can’t you handle this? This is just an annoying coworker. Everyone has
them. Geez.
T: I hear you. I do. If this has been around for a long time—and I believe
it has—would you be willing to handle it differently? Instead of treating
these self-critical thoughts as though they are meaningful—like if
they were coming from your boss or your mom—could we treat them
as though they were coming from an announcer at a sporting event?
Announcers just keep talking whether you want them to or not. And if
you get too caught up in what the announcer is saying you might miss
out on the game. Maybe you can treat these thoughts in your head like an
extra negative announcer at a sporting event.
C: But they feel so real.
T: They do. This announcer really wants your attention. This one is good.
There will be times to listen to him, but there are other times when he
can just be ignored. Actually, there might be lots of times when he can be
ignored.
The point of this description is not to suggest you use this analogy but to help
you see how you can link the client’s responses from homework into material you
will cover later in session.
81
ACCEPTANCE AGAIN
Two issues generally show up when addressing acceptance. First, acceptance of

inner experiences is not something with which most clients have experience.
Therefore, it is likely they will have lost touch with your discussion about accept-
ance from last week. In our experience, the client’s connection with actual accept-
ance lasts for maybe a day or two at this point. There is too much pressure from
the outside world to regulate their inner experiences. Furthermore, the client
likely also has some long-held belief that if they try hard enough, they will be able
to regulate or control their interfering inner experiences. It is difficult to give up
this belief.
Second, the client probably experiences the difficult thoughts, feelings, or
bodily sensations as scary—even terrifying at times. Thus, the idea of just letting
them be there is counterintuitive. Clients often feel like they need to be doing
something because, even if it is not working, they feel like they are at least trying.
We have heard clients say things like, “You expect me to sit here and do nothing
about it?” We understand where that feeling comes from, but that type of belief is
based on an inaccurate rule. It is sort of like saying, “You don’t want me to comfort
my baby. You want me to let him fall asleep all by himself?” Sometimes what our
minds tell us is right is not what is actually going to work best. The client has been
engaged in the control agenda for so long that they cannot see another option and
the inner experience is perceived as so threatening that allowing it to just be there
is unfathomable.
One of the interesting things about how cognition works is that our thoughts
are sometimes experienced like the real event. When a client worries about a
negative future event, they might feel real anxiety about that event. When they
think about a past sad event, they might feel depression. If they remember a
trauma, they might feel fear. Even if the feeling is less intense, it is still there.
The mind experiences these cognitions as if they were much more real than they
actually are. We often say to our clients, “I am not asking you to be willing to
have the trauma that happened to you. I am asking you if you can be willing to
have a memory about the trauma.” When fusion is still high, acceptance will be
hindered. Acceptance and defusion are tied together because it is difficult to ac-
cept things that appear truly scary and dangerous. With defusion in place, the
client can hopefully recognize the inner experiences for what they are: thoughts,
conditioned emotions, bodily sensations. Therefore, when acceptance is covered
this second time, we like to review it and intertwine defusion.
Talk to clients about trying acceptance again
As we just noted, the client might have struggled with implementing acceptance.
They likely tried it and either found the whole thing too overwhelming or worked
at it for a short while before shifting back to their previous methods of emotional
82
control. If you have not already discussed it during the homework review, talk to
the client about how they responded to their difficult inner experiences over the
week. There will be examples from homework and their day-to-day activities. It
is important to have this conversation so you can use examples from the client’s
life to talk about acceptance. The only way you will know which elements of ac-
ceptance were difficult for them is through talking to them about it. We will offer
some general guidance on how to go over acceptance again. The descriptions and
exercises are general and tackle many issues that occur when trying to implement
acceptance.
General description of acceptance
Acceptance is about finding a way to objectively notice all inner experiences and
consciously deciding how to respond to them. Inner experiences are not good or
bad; they are just indicators that something is going on. Sometimes it is a good
idea to respond to inner experiences and other times, not so much. Take hunger,
for example—for many people, eating and hunger are not perfectly correlated.
We experience the feeling of hunger and, depending on a number of variables, we
decide what makes the most sense to do. I (M.P.T.) have literally eaten at a burger
place and felt hunger for a second meal. The feeling of hunger was there, but
I did not need to act on that feeling. I often say at workshops, “When I feel love
toward my wife, acting on that emotion has never gone wrong.” Theoretically,
there could be times when it would not make sense, like calling my wife from a
meeting to tell her I love her. However, in my experience, it has always worked
out to act on that feeling. We want the client to have the ability to have any inner
experience and have the flexibility to do whatever they want in that moment.
Then, when anxiety, depression, pain, fear, or other inner experiences show up,
the client can still follow their values. Here is what I would say if I was seeing a
client for a second time and they had just practiced being more accepting and
were struggling with it.
Being willing is an interesting thing. It involves treating all internal events

openly and skeptically. Some things that occur within our bodies are very
informative, whereas a whole bunch of events that occur in our bodies mean
nothing. Just take 30 seconds and sit there and see what shows up in your
mind. Even in the brief time we have just been talking I have had thoughts
about work I have to do, how I’m hungry, how much time is left, asking my-
self if this is going well . . . and that was just in the past minute.
Your mind will throw out thoughts all day long. I’m going to estimate that
90% of them are basically meaningless observations of the world. It’s like an
announcer talking about the things you see. Our issue is, certain thoughts
or feelings show up and they really grab us. For some clients it’s body image,
for others it’s worthlessness, and for others it’s fear that something bad might
happen in the future. The thought just before about needing a haircut was
83
no biggie and then—BOOM—that thought about your weight shows up and

everything comes to a halt. For some reason, your mind has decided that
thought is worth listening to. You can’t just see this thought like the other
ones. It gets special attention. But why? Does it have to?
I would like you to practice treating all thoughts as just things that pop up
in our heads. This will be super easy with certain thoughts and way harder
with other ones. But at the core, they are all just thoughts. This will certainly
take practice. Being willing is a skill like any other activity that you do.
School teacher analogy
Maybe it is a little like this: let’s say you volunteer at an elementary school. If
you have children, you can imagine being in one of the rooms. If you don’t,
think of doing a friend a favor and helping out in a room for a few hours.
I don’t know if you have ever been in an elementary school room but they are
a controlled-chaos sort of thing. Most teachers have excellent control over
the room, but in every classroom I have been in there is still a bit of madness
going on. Even if the kids follow along really well and do what is asked of
them, they still do odd things from time to time. For example, one kid might
hit another kid. I’ve seen kids raise their hands and say crazy things. One
time, I saw a kid raise his hand and after the teacher called on him, he said,
“We got a new cat.” The teacher didn’t reinforce that action; she just moved
on to the next raised hand. I’ve seen kids wander around the classroom, or
walk up to the whiteboard and try and help the teacher, or fight, or argue; the
list goes on. I am sure there are students the teachers love and others they re-
ally dislike. Yes, teachers yell, but they are also sweet, patient, and respectful,
and, above all, they work with our children every day to make them better
and more talented little kids.
Pretend the kids are your inner experiences and you are the teacher.
Some thoughts or emotions are doing what you would like and some are
not. You can do things to affect them but you don’t have total control over
them. You love some of the thoughts and you wish some would move away
or go to another classroom. Yet, all you can really do is arrange things the
best you can and then be patient with what you can’t control. I would also
imagine teachers stay in contact with their values throughout the day. I’ve
asked some, and they have goals such as get every student to “grade level” on
tests. Other have goals such as helping their students be “successful” in their
lives. Some speak about building self-esteem in the kids. No matter what it
is about, they are working toward something meaningful—something they
value. If the teacher can stay in contact with that value, there is always a
clear move in terms of teaching, no matter how well or poorly behaved the
students are. How might you be like the teacher, and how might your inner
experiences be like these students?
84
ACCEPTANCE NEEDS DEFUSION TO WORK
Acceptance is deeply dependent on defusion. Defusion is the skill of being

able to see inner experiences for what they are. A thought is only sounds and
pictures in one’s head, a feeling is just bodily reactions along with cognitions,
and physiological sensations are more intense bodily reactions occurring at
unexpected times. If we go back to the introduction chapter (Chapter 1), re-
call that fusion is the result of being able to respond to one event in terms
of another and how the impact of those events changes accordingly. This is a
life-enriching and life-saving ability. You only need to look at something that
might be dangerous to feel fear and surmise you should handle the situation
more cautiously. You can also learn through direction and instruction. Our
verbal abilities allow us to effectively respond in many situations by making
sense from cues in the environment and allowing us to experience emotions
appropriate for that situation. We do not need to wait for real consequences.
We “get it” immediately.
For example, if I sense my partner is feeling down, I can go through options
of how to improve their day. Given every little thing going on in our lives, I can
think of what would most likely make them happy. I can predict how they will
respond to an event we have never encountered. This same ability also allows
me to experience what it would be like to get fired, lose a loved one, or be seri-
ously injured. These have never happened to me but I can sense what they would
be like. As therapists, we get a lot of training and opportunities to learn how to
not get entangled in these types of thoughts, but many of our clients have not
learned this. When something in their world cues one of these thoughts, they
experience it as real and powerful, and partially because of the power they give
the thought, they get pulled into doing something about it. Defusion provides
separation between the inner experience and everything that comes with it. The
inner experience still occurs, but the client is able to see it as sounds in the head
and sensations in the body—not as the event itself. When a thought is just a
thought, it is easy to make room for it. When it is perceived as real, it makes
sense to do everything we can to avoid it. Here is how we might first introduce
this to a client.
Having language is a blessing and a curse. Language has allowed us to live in

luxury compared to all other things on this planet. Look around. We are in
a nice room, the temperature is what we want, we are safe, and we have eve-
rything we need. There is a restroom right down the hall. We have a white-
board right here so we can write things down and talk about them. Heck,
even the walls are insulated so sound does not travel between rooms. This is
set up just as we need it. We can thank language for the ability to set this up.
Because of language, humans have done amazing things. Our life expectancy
keeps increasing. We have lots of interesting things such as movies, music,
85
delicious food, and the list goes on. Without language, we could not have
accomplished all this.
But the curse of language is, I can ask you right now to tell me about some-
thing horrible or unfair that happened to you and, even though it might have
happened many years ago, you will feel sadness or guilt about this event. You
might even tear up or cry—not that crying is bad. Just notice that language
allows us to experience events that are not happening right now—or maybe
never even happened—just through talking or thinking about them. I am
sure you have had the experience of being in bed ready to go to sleep, when
you think about something unfortunate that happened to you—or might
happen to you. Boom. Now you are lying in bed with an anxious feeling,
even though you are totally safe in that moment.
This is the power of language. If we want to enjoy its benefits, we have
to deal with the problems that come with it. If we want to live comfortably,
we also have to experience fear, doubt, depression, and anxiety—even when
they are unwarranted. Without language, we would just be in the moment
such that when we are fed, warm, dry, and safe, we would be pretty stable
emotionally. We might feel fear at times, but we would not be anxious.
However, the same thing that allows us to feel anxiety also tells us to save
money for retirement—and allows us to daydream about retirement. There
is no surgery we can get or medicine we can take to change how this works.
This is what human minds do. Our work is to figure out how to respond to
this process.
Once you have laid the groundwork for how thoughts work and the utility of
defusion, discuss with your client times when the mind is really helpful and times
when it is not. Most of us can easily think of when it saved us from a problem or
made life better, but we can also think of times when it did the opposite.
T: As I said earlier, the mind is going at all times. It has something to say
about everything. I often use this little example to help show our minds
cannot just let something be. It will judge, evaluate, criticize, predict,
plan, and so on. Again, this ability is a blessing and a curse. It allows us
to do wonderful things. It also allows us to do horrible things and torture
ourselves in the midst of plenty. Look around this room and see if there is
anything you are unfamiliar with.
C: There is that electronic thing on the ceiling.
T: OK, guess what it is.
C: I would think it has something to do with Wi-Fi or maybe a fire alarm
system.
T: Look around the room some more and see if there is anything you
can’t name.
C: I can pretty much name everything.
86
T: OK, now label everything in this room that you don’t like.
C: OK. I don’t like the pictures. They are cheap. I don’t really like this table.
It is also cheap. The wall colors are only OK.
T: Awesome. My guess is that you could keep going. I don’t really need you
to do that. I just wanted to you to see that your mind can name just about
everything. It can also evaluate just about everything. We don’t even need
to try to do this. It just occurs. It’s natural.
After the client understands that, ask the client about times when their
mind does this same thing and it brings their life down. For example, how
does the mind treat thoughts about the client’s life and successes? What does
the mind say about feelings that occur when asking someone out on a date?
We are not saying the mind has nothing useful to say—simply that it has an
opinion about everything and that this limits our ability to interact with things
nonjudgmentally.
T: Humor me for just a minute. What if every parent taught their child
to see anxiety for what it is: a physiological response? This is sort of a
magical question because society, media, and loved ones will all teach
the child anxiety is “bad.” But what if a child could experience anx-
iety without any language added to it and be given the freedom to see
what they naturally and honestly think about anxiety? As someone
who has been working at this for a long time, I can tell you, having an
open mind allows you to see these events differently. I am more flex-
ible with anxiety now than I was before, and that comes from seeing
it for what it is not what it says it is. It is not our job to stop the cog-
nitive process; we could not do this even if we tried. And we probably
have tried. Our job is to learn what to do with it when it happens.
There are many ways to think about our minds. I like to think of it as
an announcer at a sporting event, a child in a kindergarten class, or
a salesperson who is trying to convince you to purchase something.
They may say useful things every once in a while, but a lot of what
they say is not helpful and sometimes even harmful if acted on. Let’s
try an exercise right now to see what it might be like to do something
different with your thoughts. Simply notice them as thoughts without
getting caught up in them, fighting with them, or believing every-
thing they say is true.
There are a number of exercises you can use in the moment to help your clients
practice defusion. We list a few in the sections that follow, but we recommend
picking one and sticking with it to help your clients really get defusion, rather than
running through several exercises superficially. You can use the other exercises at
a different time. A good strategy is to have the client practice it in session with
you, debrief to help ensure the exercise has a defusion function, troubleshoot any
issues, and then assign it for homework.
87
Objective versus subjective evaluations
A brief exercise you could use at this point would be to expand on a discussion
of how our minds add evaluations and judgments to experiences. We like to help
clients see that our thoughts will offer objective evaluations of things at times
and subjective evaluations at other times. Both can be useful depending on con-
text; subjective evaluations can sometimes cloud an event. For example, a “long
test” is different from an “unfairly long test.” Adding that subjective part can alter
the experience of that test. While there is no stopping these mostly automatic
evaluations, it is worth helping the client be aware that this occurs. We like to
teach this by using a common item, such as a water bottle.
T: I’d like to do a little exercise with you to help us see the funny things our
minds do. Let me find something in this room that is fairly common. OK,
here is the water bottle I have been drinking out of today. I’d like you to
tell me objective things about this bottle. Tell me things everyone would
agree with.
C: OK, it’s a cycling type water bottle—one a person riding a bicycle would
use. It’s clear with a black cap. It has an “S” on the side. It’s smaller than
other types of cycling water bottles. It’s pretty scratched up. If I held it
without water, it would be light.
T: Awesome. Now tell me subjective things. Things not everyone might say.
C: It’s too small. Thus, it is not a good one because the bigger ones hold
more water. It is a cheap one. It’s the type of bottle you get for free at
some event. It’s old because it is all scratched up. Also, it’s not neat, new,
and pretty like other ones. I don’t really like it. It looks like it would leak.
T: That is great. Thanks so much. Now let’s do the same thing with the
feeling of anxiety. Give me objective descriptions about anxiety. What
are elements of your anxiety that are facts, things everyone would
agree with?
C: OK. It involves thoughts about how I don’t fit in. My heart goes faster. My
muscles tighten up. My stomach feels different.
T: Now tell me about the subjective part.
C: I hate it! I wish I was different. I think it is unfair. It hurts. It sucks!
T: Thanks. Doing this exercise is not really an answer to your anxiety.
But it can be useful to see the difference in the factual parts of anx-
iety—thoughts, muscle tension, stomach discomfort—and its subjective
parts—hate, unfairness, pain. One part is inherent to anxiety. The other
part we are adding. Let’s practice focusing on the objective part over the
next week. When you have a difficult experience, see if you can notice
the objective parts and also the subjective parts your mind adds to it. Just
watch your mind at work as it adds evaluations and judgments. Notice
what happens to the power of these evaluations and judgments when you
practice watching your mind.
8
Labeling-thoughts mindfulness exercise
This is a common mindfulness exercise in which clients practice attending to

their breath, noticing when their attention wanders to thoughts, simply labeling
the thought as “thinking,” and returning back to the breath when ready. Labeling
thoughts for what they are, rather than focusing on their content, is a way to prac-
tice defusion. This exercise is grounded with the attentional focus on the breath.
This way, clients can notice when they lose their focus (as they focus on thoughts
instead of breathing) and have something to attend to after defusing from a
thought. We recommend guiding your client through the meditation for 5 minutes
or so, giving enough time and pauses between your prompts to experience what it
is like to get lost in thoughts, catch and label the process, and return to the breath.
We typically introduce the exercise with something like this:
Let’s try something to help you practice noticing when you get stuck in your
thoughts and how to get unstuck. For the next few minutes I’m going to
ask you to close your eyes and attend to your breath. As you focus on the
sensations of breathing in and out, your attention will naturally wander to
other things, including thoughts. The core of this practice will be to notice
when you are caught up in your thoughts and label them by repeating gently
in your head “thinking.” In other words, rather than focusing on what your
thoughts are saying, just acknowledge them as part of the natural process of
thinking. After you label “thinking” a few times in your mind, gently return
your focus back to your breath. You might find some thoughts are strong and
your attention doesn’t wander back quickly or that you get caught up in new
thoughts just a moment later. Whatever you experience is totally fine, the
important thing is to stick with noticing your thoughts and labeling them as
“thinking” even if you spend the whole exercise doing so.
We would then guide the client through the mindfulness exercise. We typically
ask clients to get in a comfortable and alert position with both feet firmly on the
ground and their eyes closed or gaze focused a few feet in front of them. We rec-
ommend memorizing some common prompts for guiding the exercise but not
reading a script, so it flows more naturally and so you can practice at the same
time with your client (after all, it can be helpful for therapists too).
Here is an outline for a labeling mindfulness exercise you can generally follow.
Keep in mind the pauses between prompts are key, so your clients have time to
practice what they’ve been instructed. We typically recommend having more fre-
quent prompts at the start and spacing them out more and more as the client gets
going in the exercise.
1. Get centered: Take a few moments to get present. Notice the sounds
you can hear right now . . . the sensation of your feet contacting the
floor . . . of your body contacting the chair . . . .
89
2. Focus on the breath: Now bring all of your attention to your

breathing. . . . Following the sensations of your breath as you
inhale . . . and exhale. . . .
3. Notice when your attention wanders: When your attention wanders, as it
will naturally do, simply acknowledge whatever caught your attention. If
it’s a thought, just label it “thinking” in your mind. . . . And then return
back to the breath when you are ready.
4. Encourage ongoing labeling: Continue to focus on your
breath. . . noticing and labeling your thoughts as “thinking.” . . . Each
time you get caught up in thoughts, just repeat “thinking” in your
mind. . . . Practice labeling for a few more breaths. . . .
5. Expand awareness: Take a few moments to expand your
awareness . . . noticing the sensations of your feet contacting the
floor . . . the sounds in the room . . . and when you are ready, open
your eyes.
After the exercise, debrief with the client, focusing on what their experience
was like practicing the exercise. While there are many things that a client could
take away from an exercise like this, hopefully your setup and the manner in
which you presented it orients the client to notice how they get caught in their
thoughts. You may note to clients that we all get caught up in thoughts, and a pri-
mary purpose of the practice is to simply practice catching when this happens. It
is also worth helping clients notice how they can let go of thoughts they get caught
up in and return to just labeling them for what they are. We suggest telling the
client that this can be a useful exercise to practice as it will allow them to notice
their thinking and give them a pause so they can decide whether to listen to their
thinking or not.
Breaking the rules
This last exercise focuses on guiding your client to set a behavioral commitment
related to defusion. This involves helping your client identify a “rule” their mind
gives them that is unhelpful to follow, a way they could act inconsistently with the
rule, and a commitment to break the rule, with a specific goal.
You can introduce the exercise with something like this:
Our minds give us many rules it says we should live by. Rules can be great
at times, helping us stick to our goals, do what is effective, and stay out of
trouble. For example, my rule “brush your teeth every night” helps me keep
my teeth clean even when I don’t feel like it, or “treat other people the way
I want to be treated” helps me be caring to other people even when I have the
urge to snap at them. Unfortunately, we usually leave our minds in charge
when deciding what rules to follow, and not all rules are helpful. For ex-
ample, my rule “meet your commitments” seems helpful, but I notice that it
90
also leads me to overprioritize work over other important things in my life,

or burning out on work rather than asking for an extension. What is a rule
your mind gives you that isn’t helpful?
You could then work with the client to identify a rule they get fused with
and that leads to unhelpful actions, which might be relevant to work on for the
next week. If your client has trouble identifying one, you might recall previous
discussions you’ve had with them or work backward from a problem situation
they reported. If you really struggle with finding a personally relevant rule, you
could also help them identify a more common, unhelpful rule (e.g., “finish your
plate”) or even a reasonable rule that they could still practice breaking (e.g.,
“shower before leaving the house”). Part of the function of this homework is to
introduce flexible responding to a rule. That is, you want to teach your client that
rules can be broken sometimes.
Once you’ve identified an unhelpful rule, you can introduce the idea of
breaking it.
Looking back on this rule, you probably feel pretty sure it isn’t always useful.
But in the moment, your mind is persuasive and convinces you to follow it.
What we need to do is start practicing and strengthening your ability to break
these rules by doing things that go against the rule. Just like with practicing
playing a musical instrument, the more you work on breaking your rules, the
better you will be at it and the more likely you can do it well when it matters.
This can feel very uncomfortable and your mind won’t like it. That’s good
if you notice discomfort because it means it will help strengthen your rule-
breaking skills—just like how a hard bike ride means you are strengthening
your biking muscles. So, what could you do this week that would break
your rule?
Once you’ve identified a specific behavior that would be inconsistent with the
rule, take a few moments to strengthen the commitment. Make sure the commit-
ment is specific (i.e., stating what the client will do, when, for how long), is real-
istic, and refers to an observable action (something another person can confirm
they did). Also, get a feel for whether the client is committed, and if not, explore
how to modify the goal or otherwise enhance commitment.
HOW DO WE KNOW WHICH INNER EXPERIENCES

TO LISTEN TO?
We do not generally hear this concern from clients, but we often hear this from
people we train. Trainees sometimes worry if a client successfully practices
defusion, they might stop listening to any thoughts they have and behave as if
they were no longer guided by a conscience. We understand where that fear comes
from. We just explained the benefits of and problems with having cognition. The
91
way we usually address this is by reminding the client that cognitions are helpful
when the client can objectively say they are helpful. They are not helpful when
they take the client away from what they want in life. The client will need to adopt
this new way of evaluating cognitions. We would explain it like this:
Sometimes, clients worry about how they will know which thoughts to listen
to. I like to think of it like this: All thoughts are suggestions. Some are useful
and some are not. You will have to practice and see what works for you. But
you will need to be honest with yourself about this. I think following some
thoughts will not improve your life, whereas following other thoughts may.
Until you actually follow through on behaviors, you may not be able to tell
which thoughts are helpful to listen to. It can be a funny thing. I have had
some of the most fun times in my life at events I did not want to go to. I have
had some of the best outcomes when I chose to approach while my inner
experiences were telling me to stay away. Over time, I have come to learn
how things work for me. I’m not perfect at it, but I have been surprised by
the odd signals my mind sends me. It certainly tells me things but sometimes
they are cryptic, and I get to figure out how much power I want them to have
over my actions.
WRAP UP WITH HOMEWORK
We recommend setting a behavioral commitment every session, so your client

always has something to work on or at least think about in between sessions. The
objective is to create opportunities for generalization of skills to real-life situations
and extend your influence on your client’s life as much as possible. Remember
that what you are teaching in session may not be automatically reinforced in your
client’s environment, so you will need to provide some scaffolding to increase the
likelihood your client contacts natural reinforcers (e.g., by engaging in meaningful
action). Given that this session focused on acceptance and defusion, ask your
client to identify a behavioral commitment that will allow them to practice these
skills. We recommend extending the exercise practiced in session (e.g., noticing
objective versus subjective thoughts, brief mindfulness practice, or breaking an
unhelpful rule) so your client has the opportunity to “get” defusion. If appropriate,
you could also assign a more general homework task:
T: What is a situation in which you would really want to be able to practice

willingness and noticing thoughts as thoughts?
C: Probably when I’m trying to text my friends to hang out with me. I never
end up doing it because I feel like a burden and that everyone hates me.
T: That’s a great example. Those sound like powerful thoughts right now.
C: Yeah. They feel that way.
T: Why would it be important to you to text these friends?
92
C: Because I want to have friends and I like being around people. I like con-
necting with others. I don’t want to be a hermit.
T: OK. How many times would you like to text your friends to hang out
this week?
C: Maybe let’s start with one time.
T: Great, and what specifically would you need to practice to send the text?
C: Well, I would need to let the fear of rejection just be there . . . and I would
need to notice those self-critical thoughts as thoughts. And I guess
I would need to just send the stupid text anyway.
T: All that sounds great. What external barriers might get in the way of your
meeting this goal?
C: Nothing, really. It’ll take me less than a minute so I will have time. It’s
more the internal stuff that will make this hard.
T: And what might make it easier for you to meet this commitment?
C: Telling you about it now and knowing we are going to talk about it next
week will probably help.
T: OK, and I will be sure to check in with you next week.
After this conversation (or during it if your client is all right with that), com-
plete the Behavioral Commitment Worksheet provided in Appendix C in this
book. Make sure your client agrees with and relates to the words written down in
the worksheet. The function of the worksheet is to bring some of the therapeutic
context outside the therapy room to facilitate generalization of skills. It is not just
another checklist to be completed.
SESSION SUMMARY
By the end of these sessions, your client should have learned the basics of ac-
ceptance and defusion. Throughout these sessions you have walked your client
through exercises, metaphors, and discussions about emotions and real- life
events to understand what it is like to relate to inner experiences in an accepting
and defused way. Your clients should have an understanding of why this new way
of relating to their thoughts and feelings matters to them and fits with their goals
for therapy. You have also assigned behavioral commitments for homework in the
past few sessions to support your clients’ practice of acceptance and defusion, so
they can apply these skills to meaningful life activities and goals.
93
Sessions 5 and 6
Acceptance, Defusion, Mindfulness, and Values
You should be at your fifth therapy session—depending on how quickly your

client grasped the concepts covered in previous chapters. By now, your client
should see their clinical issue a little differently. Hopefully, they no longer work to
control specific thoughts, feelings, or emotions and now work to respond to them
in more useful ways. They should also be orienting their actions toward living a
meaningful life rather than regulating emotions. In this session, you will review
and continue to build on skills your client has already been working on while
incorporating new processes of change. By helping your client see how all the
processes of change are connected, you might shift how they practice these skills
and move them toward doing so more effectively.
REVIEW HOMEWORK
At the start of every session from now on, you will spend the first few minutes
reviewing the behavioral commitment you set with your client last week. As
we mentioned in the previous chapter, you will want to go over a couple key
points with your client: (1) “What was it like to do things you care about?”
and (2) “Psychologically (or internally), what was it like to try and make these
changes?” The objective in reviewing homework is to guide your client toward
contacting their direct experience of trying out new behaviors so they can judge—
on the basis of their values—whether those behaviors worked for them. As you
talk about the homework, you should also be assessing areas of skills deficits and
emphasize them accordingly in your session.
94
REVIEW PURPOSE OF THERAPY: VALUES
The concept of values gets addressed later in this book, but it can often be useful to
give a taste of the concept earlier in treatment. It is nice to talk about values after
acceptance and defusion have been addressed. Without acceptance and defusion,
a discussion about values can be somewhat rule-bound and less meaningful. For
example, if someone is avoidant of feeling strong emotion and their thoughts are
perceived as powerful, they may be unwilling to experience the internal events
that go along with stating values inconsistent with their actions. For example, if
someone really valued time with family but was so busy with work that they were
not home at night or during the weekends, stating that to a therapist would likely
evoke a feeling of guilt or sadness. Practicing a little acceptance and defusion
lessens the blow of stating one’s genuine values.
There are times when a prolonged discussion of values earlier in therapy is
wise. In our experience, it is worthwhile to spend a bit of time on values earlier
in therapy, when motivation to change behavior is low. We have found motiva-
tion is generally high for behavior change with certain disorders such as anx-
iety disorders. Individuals who present with disorders that are egosyntonic (i.e.,
enjoyable), such as trichotillomania, substance use, and eating disorders, would
particularly benefit from discussing how life might be better with some behavior
change. Additionally, some clients might just benefit from having a little extra
meaning to the therapy. Because acceptance and defusion have only been touched
on at this point, it makes sense to have just a brief discussion about values to give
meaning to therapy and provide better direction.
One of the things that has always struck us about our clients is the enormous
amount of time they have spent trying to regulate internal experiences. In con-
trast, people we know who are functioning pretty well maybe spend 10% of their
day regulating their internal experiences. This is because instead of expending
time and energy attempting to control internal experiences, they spend time on
things meaningful to them. This is a simple explanation of what we are hoping to
help our clients accomplish: decrease the amount of time spent trying to regu-
late internal experiences and increase the amount of time spent pursuing valued
activities.
Presenting this conceptualization to a client can orient them to the rewards
of pursuing values and some of the pitfalls of attempting to regulate internal
experiences. The following conversation exemplifies this.
Therapist (T): We have been working together for a handful of sessions

and it seems like we are making progress. There is one issue I would like
to spend a few minutes on. In many ways, I think we should have gone
over this earlier in therapy, but I also don’t know if it makes as much
sense at that point. Are you open to going over a new topic?
Client (C): Yes, and I’m curious.
T: What do you think is the point of our work together?
95
Acceptance, Defusion, Mindfulness, and Values95
C: I originally thought it was going to be learning how to control my anx-

iety, but I’ve come to believe it is more about learning how to handle it
when it shows up.
T: OK. But why would you want to control it or learn how to handle it
better?
C: I guess so I can get back into life.
T: Yes, that is sort of what I was thinking, too. My guess is that we are
working together so you can have all the exciting parts of your life back,
but because anxiety is such a roadblock right now, we spend the whole
time talking about anxiety, your relationship to it, and how you respond
to it. It makes it seem like therapy is about anxiety when we wouldn’t
even be talking about it unless it was getting in the way of your doing
what is important to you.
C: That’s a good point. We really have been focusing on it. But we do talk
about how my life is going in general.
T: Yes, we do. But let’s spend just a few moments on the big picture of why
we are doing this. Prior to coming in to work with me, what percent of
each day was spent trying to regulate your anxiety?
C: It’s hard to say, because sometimes it was for a few seconds every minute.
There were other times when it was hours on end. But if I was awake for
16 hours a day—sometimes more when I was awake and worrying—I
would say at least half of each day was spent caught up in my anxiety in
some way. Wow, that is depressing!
T: It’s what it is. I always think it is positive that you are seeing this, so you
can choose to handle it differently. OK, but back to the 50% of your day
spent regulating anxiety. Where do you think you are now, after a month
of us working together?
C: Maybe 40%. At least I recognize it and try to do things differently.
T: OK, great. Have you found your life is improving or our work is making
it less desirable?
C: Improving.
T: OK, so it is worth moving forward with this type of work. I’d like for us to
think about our work as taking time from control and moving it to living.
There is only so much time in your day. As you decrease the amount
of time spent regulating emotions, what would you like to spend that
time on?
C: What do you mean?
T: Let’s say you open up an hour of time and energy per day. I think you
should fill that with meaningful things. I’d like to discuss what those
things are for you. For example, some days when I get in to work I tell
myself, “If you don’t putter on the internet, you can leave an hour early
today.” I’m swapping my putter/procrastination time for something more
interesting.
C: OK, I would love to cook more, exercise, garden, call family, generally
keep up with the house, stuff like that.
96
T: Awesome. So, one of the things I would really like to see this week is
increasing time spent each day on something you enjoy but that you
would not have done previously. That is, I’d like to see an increase in
pleasurable or meaningful activities each day. Instead of adding a whole
hour per day, how about we just add one thing? I don’t care how long it
takes, but I’d like you to do one thing you find meaningful that you have
not been doing as much as you’d like to every day.
C: OK, I think I get it. Each day I need to do something new and
meaningful?
T: Yes, just do one little thing. Maybe it is going to the gym, cooking dinner,
seeing a friend, calling home, whatever.
C: OK.
T: And one last thing, let’s be flexible. Sometimes the thing you plan will not
work. A client will plan on calling mom or dad, and then call and they
were not home. If that happens, do something else. Go for a walk. Call a
sibling or a friend. Try a new food. Do something.
C: OK.
REVIEW ACCEPTANCE AND OFFER EXERCISES
This is a good opportunity to go over acceptance with a real-life example. The

method described here was also explained in Chapter 6. Ask the client about a
situation in which they struggled with implementing acceptance. We like to say
something like, “Tell me about a situation where you wanted to practice accept-
ance but found it difficult.” When the client describes a situation where they
struggled, it is your job to keep asking questions about that situation so that they
can start to get a sense of what it really felt like. You want them to start to experi-
ence that event—as if it were happening in the session. You might ask:
• What thoughts did you have in that situation?

• How did you respond to that feeling?
• Do you feel you often struggle in situations like this?
• How do you wish you had handled that situation?
Your goal is to have a conversation about the situation to help the client expe-
rience some of the internal experiences that came along with that event. As the
feeling from that event starts to be more present in the room, you can work with
the client to practice acceptance. It might look something like this:
T: Tell me about a situation where you wanted to practice willingness and

ran into difficulty.
C: I was with my kids and they were driving me nuts. I just asked them to
help set the table for dinner and they were not helpful at all. They would
do one step and then disappear. So, I’d call them back and ask them to
97
finish the job, and they would add one more thing to the table before dis-
appearing again. Finally, I yelled at them. I really don’t want to yell. But
after asking them like five times to do one simple thing, I lost it. If I can
vent for a second, I cook a whole healthy meal and clean up all the pots
and pans. I also do the shopping and meal planning. I just want this little
bit of help and they won’t even do that!
T: What thoughts were you having?
C: I was pissed off. I kept thinking this was not fair. I had thoughts about
how this type of thing happens to me all the time. I was thinking about
how my family takes me for granted. (Note: In this example, the client
is already feeling some of the emotions from that event. If the client is
not in touch with the emotions from that event, we suggest digging at
this some more. Usually, after talking about an emotional situation, the
person begins to feel some of the associated emotions.)
T: Are you willing to work on something with me?
C: Sure.
T: I’d like you to notice what you are feeling right now. Please describe what
is occurring within you in this moment.
C: I’m feeling angry. I’m picturing the dinner. I’m replaying past situations
that were like it. Even though the event was a few days ago, I am
experiencing aspects of it.
T: Let’s talk about how you are treating those thoughts and feelings. Right
now, are you open to them and giving them space, or are you struggling
against them?
C: That’s funny you ask. Because I know what I am supposed to be doing,
but I somehow let my guard down in this room. I was totally caught up
in the thoughts. I wasn’t fighting them because there is no danger of them
right now, but I was definitely giving them a lot of attention. They pulled
me out of the moment.
T: OK. Thanks for being honest. I’d like us to do a little practice where
we work on just noticing what our minds are giving us and not getting
entangled with them. Retell the story about what happened in the
kitchen, I will continue to ask you questions about it, but when you
tell me, I want you to also objectively state what is happening inside
your body. For example, I am having the thought that . . . , or I am
experiencing the feeling of . . . , or I am experiencing tightness in my
. . . . Pretend you are an announcer of your body and you just tell me
what is happening. This will help you be more aware of what is going on
inside you and also give you a little separation from those thoughts and
feelings.
We are not going to write out this whole conversation, but hopefully the con-
versation moves forward and the client has some practice experiencing their in-
ternal experiences in a more open and defused fashion.
98
Here are some example strategies you could use after having a conversation
about a time when the client struggled with an inner experience. We would rec-
ommend just picking one to focus on in a session to extend practicing acceptance.
Self-compassion
This is a simple exercise to help clients practice being compassionate toward

themselves and their experiences:
Take a moment to picture a vulnerable person or animal that you would

want to automatically take care of, like a scared puppy, a crying child, or a
hurt friend. What comes to mind? Now picture this child [or whatever they
picked] was feeling hurt [or whatever emotion you are working with]. What
would you want to say to them? How would you want to treat them? What if
you treated yourself and your pain in the same way?
Flexible attention with a painful emotion
One way to guide your clients in practicing acceptance in the moment is to give
them a variety of prompts and questions to direct them to flexibly interact with
a painful current emotion. The idea is to have your client approach the emotion
and remain in contact with it while acknowledging the emotion for what it is.
Really, anything works that approaches the emotion without wallowing in, giving
into, or fighting with it. You might cover these within a mindful conversation you
have back and forth with the client or in a more eyes-closed exercise in which you
guide the client. We provide here a list of example prompts you can use. Pick as
few or as many as fits the situation.
• Acknowledging: “Take a moment to acknowledge whatever emotion you

are experiencing right now. Put it into words by describing what you are
feeling—like, ‘I’m feeling anxious right now.’ ”
• Observing physical sensations: “Where do you feel this emotion in your
body? Take a few moments to notice the sensations and what they feel
like in your body.”
• Breathing: “Picture breathing into this emotion and where you feel it in
your body. With each breath, open up to and make space for what you
are feeling.”
• Watching how it changes: “Continue to watch the emotion and notice
how the experience changes over time. Does it get more or less intense
over time or sort of cycle up and down? Does it expand or contract?
How does it move in your body?”
• Prompting acceptance with a metaphor, such as: “Welcome it like you
might welcome an old friend,” “Appreciate it like you might appreciate a
9
beautiful sunset,” “Hold it lightly like you might hold a delicate flower,”
or “Inspect it with curiosity, noticing the subtle details, like you might
look at a work of art.”
• Listening to it: “Our emotions are often telling us something. It could be
about something important, things that need to be changed, our current
situation, and so on. What is your emotion telling you?”
Changing but into and
Experiential avoidance shows up in the reasons clients give for not doing things
that matter to them (e.g., “I want to get out of the house more but I’m too tired,” “I
want to quit smoking but I can’t handle the withdrawal symptoms,” “I would talk
to them about this but I’m scared they will get upset”). These statements give the
illusion that difficult thoughts and feelings are truly preventing clients from doing
what matters, suggesting avoidance is the only possible solution. You can explain
this idea to your client and help them identify their own but statement. If your
client struggles to articulate their but statement, you can provide sentence stems
for them to complete, based on what you know about their history. For example,
“I really want to stop checking my locks, but.” Be sure to use an overt behavior in
the sentence stem because your client can actually control what they do—not nec-
essarily what they think or feel.
Next, introduce the idea of changing the but into an and. You can say some-
thing like this:
What if instead of a but you used an and? For example, “I want to get out of
the house more and I’m tired.” We are still acknowledging that you’re very
tired, and being tired does not negate your desire to get out of the house
or stop you from actually getting out of the house. You can get out of the
house and feel very tired, just like how you probably have gotten out of bed
before when you felt like you couldn’t get up. Your inner experiences can
come along for the ride and they don’t have to stop you from doing what
matters. It’s not so much about the change in language. You don’t have to
convince yourself you aren’t tired. Rather, what if you changed your stance
toward your inner world using an and approach? That means you choose
what you want to do and make room for whatever difficult thoughts and
feelings show up.
This exercise can help set up a behavioral commitment for the week or even
a way to practice acceptance in the moment during the session. Within this
framework you can help your client identify something they want to do while
having a challenging inner experience. Then, you can help them set a goal where
they do what matters and open up to the difficult thoughts and feelings that
might arise.
10
REVIEW DEFUSION AND OFFER EXERC ISES
Defusion is about seeing internal events for what they really are—events that
occur within one’s body. It can be a thought like, “This will never work out for
me,” a feeling like withdrawal symptoms for someone struggling with some type
of dependence, or a physiological sensation, such as chest pain in a panic attack.
These are all important experiences that tell the client something is going on.
Given our cognitive abilities, we usually experience the thought, feeling, or sensa-
tion as much more than it really is. For example, we experience a memory about
a negatively evaluated event as distressing even though it is a memory about an
event and not the actual event. Defusion exercises help the client see their internal
experiences as what they actually are: thoughts, feelings, or bodily sensations
about events, rather than the actual events.
As learning how to be experiential with exercises is key to doing ACT well, we
are going to use the same strategy we used for acceptance with defusion: Have
a conversation about a time when the client was fused with thoughts, stay on
that topic long enough that some of the experiences of fusion start to show up,
and then conclude with some work on defusion, like an exercise or an appro-
priate discussion. If you can get good at this skill, you will likely be successful at
implementing ACT across many situations and clinical presentations. The fol-
lowing dialogue should give you an idea of how this would work.
T: Tell me about a thought, feeling, or sensation that really pulled you in

over this last week.
C: Do you mean in a good or bad way?
T: If you are asking whether it pulled you in a way that is consistent with
your values or not, yes, that is what I am getting at. I believe we get to
choose when to listen to our internal experiences. Sometimes things
work out well when we listen to these inner experiences, and sometimes
they don’t. Give me an example of when getting caught up in or listening
to your internal experiences turned out poorly.
C: I had one that really stood out. I was doing homework with my child—
which is just frustrating on its own. I had also just read a frustrating
work e-mail before that so I was feeling more uptight than usual. My son
needed to read aloud for 20 minutes. It’s not really that big a deal because
we alternate pages so he’s only reading for maybe 15 of the minutes, plus
we are hanging out, which he enjoys. Then, he starts whining about how
he doesn’t want to read, can he just do it later, and all this stuff. I’m being
calm and helpful and working with him through it. Eventually, we are
10 minutes in, no pages have been read, and he’s on the floor whining
and crying. It’s all just bubbling up inside me. I’m thinking things like,
“You’d be half way done if you just started when I got into your room”
and “He should not be allowed to act this way!” So, that is all building
up and then I yell, “Knock it off!” He immediately stops and has that
10
deer-in-the-headlights look. I don’t think I’ve yelled at him in years. Of

course, I feel like total crap now.
T: That’s rough.
C: Yes, it is. Then my wife comes in and gives me a supportive look, like she
gets it and knows how bad I feel. I think she says something like, “I’ve got
his one,” and she takes over with the kid. I say, “I’m sorry,” and leave. I go
back later in the evening and talk about it with him. But of course, I just
wish it never happened.
T: There are lots of rough parts to that, but I’d like to focus on how you
were interacting with what was going on inside of you as your child was
misbehaving. Tell me more about what you were thinking.
C: Oh, it was a continuous stream of, “This is obnoxious,” “This is why you
struggle at reading,” “You’d be pretty far along if you just started sooner,”
“I don’t want to reinforce this type of behavior,” and so on.
T: It sounds like lots of judgments about the situation and his actions. How
were you experiencing those thoughts?
C: That’s a good question. They were overwhelming. They were huge. I was
totally caught up in them. As we’re talking about it, I can tell that was not
helpful.
T: Did you have any separation from those thoughts?
C: None. I was totally wrapped up in them.
T: How do you feel about that moment?
C: Embarrassed. Depressed. I wish I could take it back.
T: How are you feeling right now?
C: Depressed and embarrassed. I can also give myself a little space because
I know parenting is difficult. I am good at parenting most of the time. But
I still have shivers when I think about yelling at my kid just because he
won’t read. I mean, everything I know about parenting says to find a new
way to do homework. You know, get some rewards, make it a little easier,
make it more fun.
T: OK, can you feel the struggle here?
C: Yes, I’m feeling pretty frustrated and keep replaying the event in
my mind.
T: OK, I’d like you to hold on to that thought or feeling. Really stay with it.
Don’t push it away. I’d like to do an exercise with it.
Seeing thoughts more concretely
In this exercise, pick an object in the room and interact with it as if it was your
client’s thoughts, exploring more and less helpful ways of responding to the
thought. This can help make abstract concepts more concrete and give you a
shorthand you can refer back to in later conversations. The specific object is un-
important. We often use a piece of paper, clipboard, or other large object that can
102
block one’s view when held close to the face, for ease of teaching. You can also
write the thought on a card.
T: Suppose this paper was the thought, “This is obnoxious,” and other
thoughts that came up with your child. It sounds like you got really stuck
in the thought when it came up last night. If this paper was the thought,
how were you responding to it?
C: I don’t know. . . . I guess I was pretty caught up with it.
T: OK, so it was like the thought was right in front of your face with all of
your attention going to it. [Hold the piece of paper close to your own
face.] What can I see right now when this thought is up in my face?
C: Not much. The paper is blocking you.
T: Yes, and my focus is on the thought—not you, our conversation, or any
other thing I could be focusing on and doing. It’s pretty hard to interact
with people when we are so caught up in our thoughts. What else could
you do with this thought [pointing to the piece of paper]?
C: I could throw it away.
T: Yes, that’s often what we think to do. I don’t like my thoughts so I’ll get
rid of them. This would be like trying to argue with the thought [shake
the piece of paper while staring at it] or maybe trying to push the thought
away [hold the paper away with a straight arm and out of sight]. Now the
thought isn’t in my face, but notice my focus and effort is on keeping this
thought away. My arm is going to get sore eventually. And what happens
eventually with these thoughts?
C: They come back.
T: Yes, and I’m right back to arguing or getting stuck in them. Well, the
strategies we’ve been talking about in therapy might give us a different
way of responding to these thoughts. What if I just acknowledged the
thought for what it was, allowed it to be there, and then got on with life
[put the thought in your lap]? Importantly, I’m not fighting with or trying
to ignore the thought. It’s right there in my lap and I can see it out of the
corner of my eye. When the thought is in my lap, what can I focus on?
C: I guess whatever we are talking about?
T: That’s right. Now, my attention and energy are open and available to
focus on whatever I want to be doing right now. Sure, the thought might
creep back up [bring thought up to the face], but I can notice it once
again as just a thought and return to what we were doing. With this in
mind, here’s a question for you. If you were going to put your thoughts in
your lap, what might you do right now? Or how could I tell right now if
you were just letting your thoughts be there in your lap?
C: Hmmm . . . I don’t really know.
T: Well, for example, for me, I’m noticing a thought, “I have to explain it
better.” If I get caught up in the thought [hold paper to face] I could talk
all day, explaining away the concepts and ideas. If I put the thought in my
lap, then I return to our conversation and what I want to be doing right
103
now, which is being curious about your experience and supporting you
in making meaningful changes in your life. I’d ask you more questions
rather than explain things to you. And there I go right now explaining
away. What about for you? How could I tell if you are placing your
thoughts in your lap?
From there, help the client identify something they could do in session to prac-
tice defusion. You might need to help them notice a thought they are stuck with
if one has not been identified and what they are pulled to do when they get stuck
in the thought. Ultimately, fusion is about how thoughts affect our actions, so
this exercise can help make sure we get to defusion in terms of doing something
different that is less dominated by our thoughts. Often, this looks like doing what
would be meaningful or effective in the moment that the client might otherwise
do if they were less stuck in or fused to a thought. That said, you could also use
this exercise to explain defusion without the in-session behavioral commitment
and instead assign homework based on this exercise. Once you’ve worked through
this exercise, you can use it as a brief reminder when discussing fused and defused
responses to thoughts in future sessions (e.g., bringing the paper up close to your
face when you notice your client being fused, or returning to the question of what
they might do if they put the thought back in their lap).
MINDFULNESS OR FLEXIBLE ATTENTION
After you have reviewed acceptance and defusion, teach flexible attention. Being
able to pay close attention to what is important is helpful for all clients. Some
clinical presentations call for it more than others, but it is useful for everyone.
Sometimes we call it “being present” because our clients are usually caught up
in their internal events and do a poor job at being present: They ruminate on the
past or worry about the future. But accurately speaking, the most useful thing we
can learn is how to pay attention to what is most useful for us at any given mo-
ment and how to shift our attention depending on the situation. For example, if
I (M.P.T.) am working on this book, most of my focus should be here, but I should
also be able to adjust that focus if needed. Similarly, if a client who struggles with
anxiety begins to experience high anxiety during some important event, it is fine
if the anxiety is noticed, but we would also want the client to be able to focus on
other important stimuli, such as the primary task in which they were engaging.
This allows the client to notice something and quickly decide whether to pay
attention to that or focus their attention elsewhere. Most of us do not consciously
decide what to pay attention to. We simply move along with our lives and pay
attention to things that work for us. But for many people, we can benefit from
learning when we are about to be pulled into something that is not useful for us
and intentionally put our attention elsewhere.
Thus, we like to present flexible attention training— or mindfulness— as
choosing what to pay attention to in any given moment, based on one’s values.
104
It is important to explain this to your client, as many will believe the purpose of
the “mindfulness” activity is about relaxation or not being affected by stressors.
To us, it is more about noticing that stressors will try and grab you and choosing
how much attention you are going to give them. Please explain that to the client.
This is also one of the more formal exercises we will do in this therapy. Give the
client a solid rationale for the exercise, practice it once in session, and then ask
the client to practice it every day until the next session. You will also want to con-
textualize the work so they can generalize skills gained from the exercise to other
situations. We do not want mindfulness exercises to only be used when practicing
mindfulness.
The following dialogue is a common way to present a mindfulness exercise
from an ACT perspective.
T: At all times, we are paying attention to something. Maybe some of us can

pay close attention to a handful of things at the same time, but generally,
we focus on just a few important things. For example, I am paying atten-
tion to you, how you are doing right now, and whether we are addressing
the important issues we should address. I am also paying a little atten-
tion to the time and small things like that. Other thoughts are coming in,
like other projects I have to get done, and maybe that I am feeling a little
hungry or thirsty or even have to go to the bathroom. But I am choosing
to let those thoughts go. I’d like to do an exercise aimed at helping you
notice times your mind tries to pull you away from whatever you have
going on. Is this OK with you?
C: Yes, sure.
T: This will last about 10 minutes. I’d like you to either close your eyes
or, if you prefer, stare at a spot that is not distracting, such as the floor
or wall. The point of this exercise is to help you see the difference be-
tween observing your thoughts and buying into your thoughts. At points
during this exercise, you will be watching your thoughts and be very
aware this exercise is occurring. Then, there will be other times when
you find yourself caught up in a thought. For me, I go for about a minute
observing what I am thinking before I have the thought some deadline is
approaching and I get caught up in how and when I am going to get the
project done. Those are moments when I buy into my thoughts. The exer-
cise stops and I am just there thinking about the project.
I’ll walk you through this exercise. I’d like you to practice noticing your
thoughts, and recognize when you get caught up in one. You will know
that because the whole exercise will stop and you will just be thinking
about that thing. When that happens, recognize that it occurred, and get
back into the exercise.
We have one main goal here: We are recognizing thoughts as thoughts
as they occur and noticing when we get grabbed by a thought. We are
not trying to push any thoughts away or have more or less of certain
thoughts. We are not concerned with whether doing this exercise causes
105
you to feel more relaxed or more stressed. You will feel how you feel
during this exercise. What questions do you have?
C: None.
T: Then, like I said, either close your eyes or stare at a blank space where
you won’t be distracted. Also, sit comfortably so you won’t have to adjust
much over the next 10 minutes. Pretend you are looking at a large screen.
It can be a movie screen, a stage, an outdoor screen, whatever works for
you. Put whatever comes to your mind next up on that screen. We are
not pushing it away or trying to get rid of anything; we are just watching
what shows up.
I don’t need you to talk to me at all during this exercise. Just follow
along with what I say. Just sit there and observe what your mind gives
you. Notice what occurs. It might be a thought, a picture, maybe even a
feeling. Whatever occurs, I’d like you to put on the screen what you are
picturing in your mind. Then, once it is on the screen, I’d just like you
to notice it is there. Just observe it. Our job is to simply observe that
thought, nothing else.
If you are having the thought, “I am not sure what he means,” then put
that thought up on the screen and observe it. If you think, “This is
stupid,” just observe that thought, too. Whatever comes to your mind,
just watch it.
There will come a point when you are not observing the thought and
you are caught up in it. You will be thinking about that thought. There
is nothing wrong with that. I just want you to recognize that it occurred
and go back to watching your thoughts.
I am going to stop talking for a couple minutes so you can focus on the
exercise. Please watch your thoughts for the next few minutes and pay
attention to times when you are pulled into your thoughts. [Wait a few
minutes.]
OK, please continue with the exercise. I hope you had the experience of
watching your thoughts and being caught up in them. Again, I’ll give
you a few more minutes to observe what occurs in your head. Put your
thoughts up on the screen and wait for the next one to show up. If the
same types of thoughts keep showing up, that is fine. Just put those
thoughts up on the screen. At some point, you will likely lose the exercise
and be thinking about one of your thoughts. [Again, give the client a few
minutes to notice the thoughts that are occurring.]
Good work. Go ahead and picture what the room looks like. Open your
eyes. Tell me what you noticed in that exercise.
C: I will admit I was a little confused initially. But as we got going, the exer-
cise made sense. I was able to watch my thinking for parts of the exercise.
T: Did you also have those moments when you were caught up in the
thoughts and the exercise stopped?
C: Yes, a couple times. It usually occurred around something I found impor-
tant. It was easy to just notice thoughts about being tired or hungry. But
106
the ones about things I needed to do or even the dinner I was planning
for the family grabbed me. The exercise ended and I was caught up in
that thought.
T: Were you able to start the exercise up again?
C: Yes.
T: The thing I really want you to take away from this exercise is the moment
when you are caught up in a thought. Notice how that thought grabbed
you and pulled you in. Is that like other events in your life?
C: Certainly. It’s similar to when I feel angry. When I feel angry, I also re-
ally buy into that feeling and my actions come right from anger. It’s
consuming.
T: Could you see a benefit to being able to watch that anger like you
watched the thoughts in this exercise?
C: Totally.
T: OK. That is our goal for this week. I would like you to do two things.
Please do this exercise for 10 minutes every day. This will give you prac-
tice observing when you get sucked into a thought. I’d also like you to
pay attention to times during the day when you are getting pulled into a
thought. Please notice it is happening and make a choice to observe that
thought, rather than be pulled into it.
You will use the same behavioral commitment worksheet you gave your client
last week (refer to Behavioral Commitment Worksheet in Appendix C). Select
a behavioral commitment that will allow your client to practice the skills cov-
ered in this session. It could be the exact same task as the one assigned in the
previous session—focusing on the same ACT process—if your client struggled
with it last week, the same task but focused on a different process of change, or a
different task altogether. Link the behavioral commitments to the exercises cov-
ered in session so your client can spend more time playing around with the skills
taught and figuring out how to practice them most effectively. Usually, we select
the exercise that the client was most able to connect with and have the client
work on the behavioral commitment while using the specific skill. For example,
if your client struggles with social anxiety and wants to reach out to friends more
often, the behavioral commitment can be “Ask friends to hang out via text twice
this week.” Within this commitment, instruct your client to practice being self-
compassionate in response to thoughts and feelings that show up: “As you work
on this goal, your mind is probably going to tell you ‘you’re not good enough’ or
‘no one likes you.’ See if you can treat yourself kindly even when your mind feeds
you these thoughts, just like you would treat a friend who believed they were not
good enough or not worth being around.” Be flexible when setting homework with
your client and bear in mind the homework tips provided at the end of Chapter 5.
For example, the client might call three people to go to a movie and all say no. The
107
client did great and followed through on the behavioral commitment. We cannot
control outcomes. The client can either stop here because the commitment was
followed, or try something else consistent with the value of being around friends.
SUMMARY
Hopefully, the client is growing in psychological flexibility. In this chapter

we addressed many aspects of the acceptance and mindfulness side of the six
processes of change. The client should be growing in their ability to be present
in the world and with themselves, see their thoughts as thoughts, and allow them
to be there when useful. We also spent time linking our work to client values.
Each client will shift at their own rate. Use of assessment tools such as the ACT
ADVISOR (Figure 2.2) will help you track growth in these processes.
108
109
Sessions 7 and 8
Acceptance, Defusion, Mindfulness, and Self-as-Context
OPENING WITH A MINDFULNESS EXERCISE
Opening sessions with a mindfulness exercise is something many ACT therapists

routinely do. It is not for every therapist or every client, but it is a good skill to
have in your repertoire. We find this to be especially useful when the therapist or
client starts the session in an emotional place. For example, it makes sense if the
client enters the session and is frustrated or not being present because of some-
thing they went through, such as a difficult drive to the session or some other
event they just attended. Similarly, if the therapist just had a hard session and
does not feel ready to be fully present for the next session, an exercise like this can
make a lot of sense. In that case, the therapist would benefit from the exercise, too.
It is beneficial because it gives the therapist and client the opportunity to focus
on therapy and create space from what was occurring prior to the session. If this
is something you or the client find useful, you can do it at the beginning of most
sessions.
As always, it is a good idea to provide some context to the exercise so the client
does not misinterpret it as a way to relax or avoid. Remind the client that the point
of this brief exercise is to be present with their goals in therapy and get ready
for the session. It is not about making any particular feeling go away. It is about
shifting focus away from the events the client was just dealing with and toward the
therapy session. We generally say something like:
I’d like to do an exercise with you to get ready for our session. I don’t know
if you ever feel caught up in other things when the session starts, but it cer-
tainly happens to me. I sometimes find that a little “getting present” exercise
helps me to focus on the session rather than whatever topic I was dealing
with prior to the session. We’ll do a short exercise to help us focus on this
therapy session. The goal is just to get into this room. I am not trying to
help you feel relaxed or get rid of any thoughts. I am certainly not trying to
10
hypnotize you. I am simply trying to help us shift from whatever tasks we

were working on just before this session to what we are here to work on. Do
you have any thoughts or questions?
We usually keep this type of opening mindfulness exercise fairly short: between
1 and 5 minutes. Like typical mindfulness meditation exercises, we usually ask the
client to be in a comfortable and alert position and to close their eyes or have their
eyes rest on a spot a few feet in front of them on the floor. During the exercise, we
have the client shift their attention to notice a variety of experiences in the present
moment in a defused, accepting way. We use a slow, calm tone and pace to elicit
a mindful presence in the room. We also use prompts to guide clients to bring
mindful qualities to whatever they are noticing (e.g., being curious, descriptive,
accepting, defused).
Listed next are common experiences we would prompt a client to notice in the
exercise, typically including three to six of these things depending on time and
how much you want to emphasize broad flexibility versus targeted focus.
• Notice the breath: You might prompt them to notice aspects such as
the sensations of their stomach or chest rising and falling, sensations of
air coming in through their nose and down their throat, the change in
temperature in the air as it enters and leaves their body, the point where
they finish breathing in and begin breathing out.
• Notice sensations in specific parts of the body: You might prompt
them to notice the feelings of their feet contacting the floor, their body
contacting the chair, their hands, their head, and so on, and to look for
specific types of sensations such as tension and temperature.
• Notice sounds in the room: Notice specific sounds, like the sound
machine or air vents, or look for more subtle sounds.
• Notice thoughts: Notice thoughts in a defused way by simply labeling
them as thoughts or watching them pass by like clouds in the sky or
leaves floating down a stream (you can be creative with the analogy you
use here).
• Notice any feelings or urges: Notice any feelings or urges right now in an
accepting way that simply treats them for what they are. You might ask
the client to notice where it shows up in their body and the sensations
associated with it.
• Take perspective on the past: You might have them practice shifting
perspectives, looking out from their own eyes as they went about their
morning routine or traveled to the session.
• Take perspective on the future: You might have them picture what they
will see when they open their eyes and return to the session or what they
will be doing later in the session or after it.
• Notice the observing perspective (self-as-context): Notice there is
a “you” noticing all of these experiences that is separate from and
1
Acceptance, Defusion, Mindfulness, and Self-as-Context111
watching these experiences come and go, a “you behind your eyes
noticing everything.”
• Notice your intentions (values): Consider what you want to be about
over the next 45 minutes of therapy and how you want to engage in the
session. What could this time be about for you?
REVIEW HOMEWORK
As always, check in on homework from the previous session. You might have a
relatively formulaic way of going about this. Be sure to cover the core points of the
homework review: (1) your client’s direct experience of engaging in meaningful
action and (2) the internal experiences that showed up as they worked on this be-
havioral commitment. This check-in—even if brief—is important for helping you
start to assess where your client is at in terms of the six processes of change and
potentially for determining the areas on which you will focus more this session.
We hope the client will have engaged in the mindfulness exercise for 10 minutes
per day. Ask the client how often they actually practiced, what they found useful
about the exercise, and what part or parts they found difficult. It is also useful to
know if practicing the exercise led to any changes in their day-to-day experience.
Maybe they were able to notice an inner experience building up and could do so
before reactively responding to it. If the client did find it useful, you may sug-
gest that they continue to practice mindfulness exercises. There are a handful of
mindfulness apps clients might find useful. These apps typically provide guided
meditations and mindfulness exercises. A list of mindfulness apps is provided in
Appendix D at the end of this book.
ASSESS WHERE THE CLIENT STRUGGLED AND TOUCH

ON ACCEPTANCE AND DEFUSION
Just like in previous sessions, use the client’s experience to help you figure out
areas where the client could use some assistance. We recommend using the ACT
ADVISOR (Figure 2.2) to organize your assessment and ensure that you consider
all six ACT processes. Ask the client about a situation in which they struggled
over the last week. We are not looking for a situation that was externally diffi-
cult, like a large work task, but something more emotionally difficult (although
sometimes these can overlap). You can say, “Tell me about an instance where
your thoughts, feelings, or sensations were a problem for you.” Then, once the
client provides an instance that they struggled with, dig deeply into that instance.
Help the client come in contact with the ways in which they are responding to
their inner experiences in those situations. Once you feel that the client is prop-
erly in contact with what it felt like in that situation, move into an appropriate
defusion or acceptance exercise. You might have already realized this: Knowing
what the “appropriate” exercise is requires you to track how your client responds
12
to previous exercises. Even then, therapists are not all-knowing and may not al-
ways perfectly predict what will work for their clients. Remember that you get to
model psychological flexibility too by trying out new exercises and being willing
to shift examples when current ones are not working out. The following is a brief
exchange that will remind you of what we are getting at.
Therapist (T): Please tell me about a situation in the last week where your
thoughts, feelings, or bodily sensations got in the way.
Client (C): I have a good one. I was fixing a screen at my house. As I say
that out loud, I feel stupid that it became such a mess. Anyway, I was
trying to get a new screen into the frame, and of course it is not going
well at all. My husband is off doing something fun in the house. If you’ve
ever put in a new screen, you know how poorly that all works. It’s so
complicated. As I struggle to get the new screen in, my feelings of frus-
tration just keep increasing. Then I start to have negative thoughts about
the whole house and how little help my husband is giving me. I do be-
lieve he could help more, but that was not really the issue at the time. It
was just that the screen was making me mad, and I was also getting mad
at his not helping me out—even though I know now it wasn’t about that.
Eventually, he comes by and asks how the screen is going. Instead of
saying, “It is difficult,” I snap and say something like, “Nothing gets done
around here unless I ask,” and “I’m tired of being the only one who takes
care of these tasks,” and so on.
T: How did things go between you two?
C: It was not good, but it was also not the worst. He got frustrated and I said
some other things I wish I would not have said. But we worked through it
in the end.
T: Values-wise, is that how you would have liked to deal with that situation?
C: Not at all. I am fine with chatting with him about how we help each
other, but that whole thing had to do with my anger around the
stupid task I was doing. I really didn’t have an issue with how much
he helps around the house. I mean, I do wish he would help more, but
at that moment, it was not an issue and not something I would have
brought up.
T: Tell me about how you responded to the frustration you were
experiencing while trying to fix that screen.
C: It overwhelmed me. It was not “just a thought I was having”; it
engulfed me.
T: Were you OK with those feelings being there?
C: No, I experienced them pretty negatively and wanted them to go away.
Even in the way that I yelled at my husband, it was just a way to deal with
the frustration I was feeling.
T: Do you wish you had handled your frustration differently?
C: Of course I do.
13
T: OK, let’s do a little exercise with the thoughts and feelings you are having
right now. Instead of evaluating them as good or bad or trying to keep or
push them away, let’s look at them like this . . .
Annoying younger sibling defusion/acceptance exercise
The goal of this exercise is to create some distance from thoughts by treating them
like an annoying younger sibling and to foster acceptance by seeing thoughts as
children who do not really think through their actions. If your client does not
have a younger sibling, you can use a younger cousin, a neighbor’s child, a friend’s
child, or any other child in their life as an example. The following text introduces
this exercise.
T: I remember growing up with my younger brother and being annoyed

with him all the time. He would always pester me and try to get my atten-
tion. But one day, I had this great idea to respond minimally to what he
had to say. He would come up to me and keep asking me, “Hey, what are
you doing?” over and over again. And I would just acknowledge him and
continue watching TV. Now, I think of that response as just what I want
clients to do with their thoughts. Maybe our thoughts are like younger
siblings and many of the things our younger siblings say are unimpor-
tant. What are some of your thoughts that just pop up out of nowhere
and sort of catch you off guard?
C: Most of mine are around my body. You know, “you’re fat,” “people are
looking at your fat,” “these clothes don’t fit,” and so on.
T: If you really thought about these thoughts, are they more like little
brother comments or more like your parents’ trying to be helpful?
C: They are more like a little kid. They just come out of nowhere and I’d be
better off treating them like you did.
T: Excellent. Can you describe what this kid looks like?
C: Oh, easy. It’s a little bossy girl who thinks she knows it all. [The therapist
can keep prompting and gaining information on this kid.]
T: I’d like you to practice treating thoughts about your looks like a younger
sibling yelling at you. I don’t see this as a life answer to your issues, but
maybe interacting with your thoughts in this way will make it a little
easier to ignore that thought in the same way I ignored my younger
brother when we were growing up.
NOTE acronym
At this point, it helps to summarize all the skills clients have been learning to apply
to new situations and challenges that arise. We typically find that a combination of
ACT skills are relevant to many situations clients encounter, including attending
14
to the present, defusing from unhelpful thoughts, accepting difficult internal

experiences without engaging in experiential avoidance, and identifying and en-
gaging in valued actions. We provide an acronym here that can help clients prac-
tice noticing an unhelpful cycle, using acceptance and defusion skills, identifying
relevant values, and doing what matters. The following is a way of introducing this
acronym to your client.
Here is a way to summarize the skills we’ve been talking about in therapy.
When you find yourself getting caught up in unhelpful patterns with your
thoughts and feelings, you can return to your NOTE. NOTE stands for
noticing what is happening, observing your thoughts and feelings for what
they are, turning toward your values, and engaging in what matters. You can
think of NOTE as like a reminder note you set for yourself, but in this case
the reminder is to practice what we have been doing in therapy. The first step
when you are getting stuck is to notice it. You need to first catch the pattern
occurring to make a change. Once you do, you can practice observing your
thoughts and feelings for what they are without fighting with them or buying
into them. This can help break the unhelpful pattern and give some space to
turn toward your values, considering what is important to you and how you
want to act in the moment. Finally, engage in what matters by doing some-
thing that fits with your values. Sometimes that might be walking away for a
moment to stop an unhelpful cycle, but the idea is you are making an inten-
tional choice to move toward your values and what is effective, rather than
continuing in a cycle where your thoughts and feelings are the ones dictating
what you do. Let’s try this now with the experience you talked about having
with your husband. What might it have looked like to practice NOTE?
We have provided a handout for NOTE you can share with your clients in
Appendix E.
INTRODUCE SELF-AS-CONTEXT
Self-as-context (or observer self) is probably the ACT process of change that
confuses the most people. But it really is not that complicated. In short, it is
defusion applied to self-evaluations or self-stories. One might wonder why we
don’t just have five processes of change and talk about other ways to do defusion.
While that is reasonable, there are enough instances where self-evaluations or
self-conceptualizations really get in the way for the client. We often see this with
clients diagnosed with generalized anxiety disorder (GAD). The client might
say, “I am a worrier. I am the one who takes care of things for the family and
without me they would all be lost.” Thus, when this client has the thought, “I
always take care of my family,” it feels powerful and particularly meaningful. In
many ways, the thought defines who they are. Self-as-context provides a different
perspective, as simply an observer of all of one’s inner experiences, including one’s
15
self-stories, rather than overly identifying with them. By doing so, clients may be
able to simply notice their self-stories as distinct from the “self ” and act in ways
that deviate from their self-conceptualizations when doing so serves their values.
For example, the person diagnosed with GAD may choose to take a day off from
household chores and go for a hike, even when doing so appears to contradict the
story that they “always take care of their family.”
We have also done a fair amount of work with the U.S. Army, and treating
“wounded warriors” is a huge part of serving those who were in combat. Many,
but not all, individuals who are in the Army see themselves as “strong, protectors,
and soldiers.” If a person experiences a grave enough injury, they may not be able
to serve as a soldier anymore. That identifying label can be lost. Their injury might
also be notable enough that they do not feel strong or like a protector anymore.
Self-labels are interesting. For some, their labels keep them moving forward, and
for others, the labels stop them from moving. If the labels move clients in the
directions they value, there is less to address clinically. But for those whose labels
stop them from moving in their valued directions, creating some defusion around
those labels (or creating a self as the context where inner experiences occur) can
benefit them. Presenting this concept can be useful for all clients, especially those
who struggle with self-conceptualizations.
It helps to spend time on self-as-context if you hear your client talk about self-
evaluations in a way that holds them back. There are two main ways this happens.
The first is the more obvious: the self-evaluation is “negative” and therefore stops
the person. For example, “I’m too shy to do that,” “I have an anxiety disorder so
this is just how it is,” or “This is just the way people in my family are.” If you hear
a client state something about themselves that seems to stop them from moving
toward their values, it is worth spending time on self-as-context.
Similarly, a client will sometimes have a self-evaluation that is generally sup-
portive and helpful. However, rigidly following or protecting that self-evaluation
in all circumstances can lead to actions that are inconsistent with values. One
example that occurs for me (M.P.T.) is I see myself as wise about my area of re-
search. I have a sense of competency and mastery in this area. I find the confi-
dence actually makes giving talks easier. Thus, this self-evaluation is helpful for
me 90% of the time. The time when I find it is not helpful is when I feel challenged
on my knowledge of my research areas. I will feel a pull to defend my position.
Even though I do not act on this pull, my self-evaluation is still getting challenged
and I feel a need to protect it. So, when a self-evaluation is helpful, it is functional
to listen to it or even feel motivated by it. But when that same self-evaluation is
not helpful, it is useful to simply recognize that it is occurring and choose not to
listen to it. Thus, if I am giving a talk and an audience member offers an alterna-
tive way of looking at things, I may benefit from noticing that my self-evaluation
is being challenged, allowing that feeling to be there, and listening to the audience
member. Thus, self-evaluations are neither good nor bad; they can be helpful or
unhelpful and that depends on the time and situation. It is up to the therapist to
help the client recognize when to listen to them and when to politely ignore them.
16
We suggest starting by discussing how the client’s self-evaluations help or hold

them back. After the client seems to understand the topic and sees why you are
bringing it up, move on to an exercise that gets at self-as-context. Here is what the
discussion might look like:
T: I want to talk about how we see ourselves. Our self-evaluations can push
us in different directions. Sometimes these evaluations push us in the
directions we are interested in going and sometimes that is not the case.
Do you have any big self-evaluations?
C: That is a good question. The one most pertinent to what we are working
on is my thoughts about how “I’m damaged.” It’s something I have felt
ever since my childhood. You know, things were pretty messed up then.
Then, as I got older I had struggles in life. I’ve always felt it was because
of my messed-up childhood. So, that’s me. I feel like I’m damaged and
that feeling certainly has affected me throughout life.
T: Thanks for telling me that. That is the type of thing I was talking about.
Tell me about a time when that thought affected you in a way you did
not like.
C: Sure. Recently, when I was dating this guy, things were not going per-
fectly. We had our struggles, but overall things were pretty good. But
whenever things were not perfect, I would blame myself for being “dam-
aged.” I’d have thoughts like, “Well, this is how things are going to go for
you because you don’t understand healthy relationships.”
T: How do those thoughts affect you?
C: At times, I notice they are automatic. They don’t really mean anything
and are just sort of thoughts that happen for me. But there are also other
times when I totally buy into them and I can almost convince myself
I don’t deserve a good relationship or allow myself to act in ways that
I don’t want, just because I don’t believe I deserve to have a good relation-
ship. I guess those thoughts sometimes get in my way.
T: Hmm, this seems pretty important. Do you feel this self-evaluation about
“being damaged” is a big deal in your life or a small issue?
C: I’d say it is a pretty big thing.
T: Like if it was a dog, would it be a Rottweiler or a miniature poodle?
C: It’s the big dog.
T: OK, so maybe we need to figure out what to do with this one.
C: Yes.
T: Maybe think about it like this . . .
You are not your thoughts, like a house is not its furniture
The purpose of this exercise is to help the client see their thoughts or other inner
experiences as events that occur within them rather than define them. This con-
cept can be presented in the following way.
17
T: Sometimes people really get pushed around by their thoughts, especially

thoughts about themselves. But maybe these thoughts we have about our-
selves are less meaningful and powerful than they say they are. To start,
let’s be clear on a self-evaluation you have of yourself that is big and really
influences you.
C: OK. I’m kind.
T: Tell me emotions you often have.
C. I am peaceful. But I’m also sad.
T: OK. Tell me some bodily sensations you often experience.
C: I have a lack of energy. I know others often have lots of energy, but I al-
ways feel drained.
T: This is all very interesting. We could keep going with things you expe-
rience. We could talk about feelings you have, thoughts you have, how
your body works, and so on. But not one of these things is you. It’s sort of
like a house. What is a house? [Give the client time to talk about houses.
Interestingly, there are many types of houses.] What is usually in a house?
[Similarly, there are many things in houses. Some houses are very empty
and some are very full.] What happens in a house? [Some houses are
busy, have businesses, and some are empty most of the year.] Here is my
point: A house is no more the building, the items in it, or the actions that
take place in it than you are your thoughts, feelings, and actions. What if
you see yourself as the place where all these events occur but not as the
events themselves? Just like your house is still your house, even if you
repainted the walls and switched out the furniture. Would you still be you
if you had different thoughts, feeling, emotions, or bodily sensations?
C: Of course.
T: So, if these things don’t define you, do you have more choice in how
you act? Just like, could I decorate my house like a cabin or an ‘80s
night club?
C: Yes.
T: This week I’d like you to think of your thoughts, feelings, and bodily
sensations as events that occur within you—like items in your house.
Let’s see if that changes how those inner experiences affect you.
This week, you would likely want your client to practice self-as-context or taking
the stance of an observer of their inner experiences rather than identifying with
them. You can still build on behavioral commitments from previous weeks and
add on a self-as-context exercise for your client to work on over the next week. For
example, if your client has been working on practicing defusion from worries by
acting inconsistently with the worries and finds it helpful to continue doing that,
use that as one of the behavioral commitments. Once you have determined the
parameters for the first behavioral commitment, you can set up the second task.
18
T: Great, so we will continue practicing defusion with breaking your worry

rules. I’d also like you to practice some of what we talked about today in
terms of seeing yourself as the house for your thoughts and feelings. How
would you like to go about that?
C: I’m not sure. Should I just sit down for 5 minutes and do a mindfulness
meditation?
T: We could definitely do that. We could also focus on using this skill with
a specific behavioral commitment like what we’ve been doing for other
sessions. For example, we’ve talked about your story that you have to take
care of everyone and how this story means you have to pick up after eve-
ryone else and make sure everyone gets to where they need to be.
C: Oh, yeah. That story keeps me so busy. It’s exhausting.
T: What would it be like to see that story as another piece of furniture in
your house? Maybe it is the grand piano passed down in your family for
generations. It feels big and important. It feels like you need to listen to it.
At the same time, you get to be so much more than an old piano, simply
by noticing you are the house containing it.
C: Yeah, that might be a helpful way to see things. Let’s do that instead.
With two behavioral commitments, feel free to use two copies of the Behavioral
Commitment Worksheet (see Appendix C) so that the parameters of the assign-
ment are clear to both you and your client. Make sure the process to be practiced
with each task is explicitly stated.
SESSION SUMMARY
In this session you will have further practiced acceptance and defusion with your
client and introduced self-as-context work to target unhelpful self-stories. You
should have continued identifying areas of growth while reviewing the homework
and using the ACT ADVISOR to guide your assessment. You should have also
tailored your focus on acceptance, defusion, and self-as-context in this session,
based on relevance to your client. Finally, you need to have assigned them home-
work related to practicing self-as-context. The goal for this session is to build on
skills previously learned while adding to their psychological flexibility repertoire
by introducing self-as-context.
19
Session 9
Values
REVIEW HOMEWORK
At the beginning of the session, ask your client how their homework went. Last
session, you introduced the idea of the observer self or self-as-context, so be sure
to check in on how your client put their understanding of this ACT process into
practice. Did they notice their thoughts as things that come and go in their mind?
Did they loosen their grip on unhelpful self-identities? Did they act independ-
ently of labels that would otherwise have kept them stagnant? If your client was
unable to take the perspective of an observer self this past week, return to the pre-
vious chapter and go over self-as-context with them again. If you notice the issue
has more to do with acceptance or being present, return to the relevant chapter.
As with every homework review, this is your chance to assess where your client
is on each process of change. You should be able to complete the ACT ADVISOR
(Figure 2.2) for the client sitting in front of you. If you have doubts about where
your client lands on any of the processes, ask them questions. You need to know
where your client is at on each of the processes to determine what you do in your
session. We recommend strengthening your client’s skills in other areas (accept-
ance and mindfulness processes) before moving on to values clarification. As we
discuss later, this is because a client who is experientially avoidant, cognitively
fused, stuck in the past, or overly attached to self-labels may struggle with hon-
estly identifying areas of life that are personally meaningful to them.
CLARIFYING VALUES
Values work, or talking about values, can increase engagement in therapy, but
the ultimate goal of clarifying values is to increase clients’ awareness of what
truly matters to them so they have a meaningful direction in which to move. This
work comes from research showing that the function or effect of target events
120
will change depending on the events with which they are verbally associated. For
example, if the client is engaging in a pattern of action that is not working to
achieve their goals, it is likely because verbal rules tell the client this pattern leads
to something important to them. Even though abusing substances ultimately
takes a person away from their long-term values, it probably takes the person
toward something meaningful in the short term. Maybe it is peace of mind, a
break from life, a supportive social group—there is something reinforcing about
that action. There is no link between the immediate actions in which the person
engages and the long-term values the person cares about. Values link immediate
actions to larger things that are meaningful to people. For example, you might do
a simple work task to get someone off your back or to check it off your to-do list.
But linking that small task to something meaningful—such as earning money
for the family, doing a coworker a favor, being part of a team—can make it more
motivating.
One reason it is so difficult to engage in tasks where the outcome is delayed—or
never occurs—is the reward is not immediately present. It is easier to do things
that give us a reward quickly (like ordering a burger at a fast-food restaurant) than
to wait for a reward for our actions (like ordering a burger and hearing it will take
a week to get to us). However, we do not always get the feedback we are used to
or like. For example, if I am kind to my wife, she appreciates it and will often tell
me, whereas my children do not know how to do that yet. I might help them with
homework or a school project and not even get a “thank you”; instead, I get anger
and maybe a little crying. The reward for helping my children with homework is
way off in the future. It might be when they get into college, graduate from col-
lege, or do something else that requires knowledge. Thus, it is easy to make doing
homework about getting it out of the way for the night so they make it through
school the next day. If doing homework with my children could be tied to helping
them have a meaningful career or a happy life, then it becomes more meaningful
in the moment.
To get this concept, think about something you do that you find immediately
unpleasant but you know is the choice you want to make in the long term. It could
be saying no to dessert, waking up early to go to the gym, or hiking in the dark
to catch a sunrise. You will not see the benefit immediately but you believe it will
be there in the future, and that makes doing the task worth it to you. These are
examples of goals or values, and they provide motivation for present actions.
The other core aspect of values discussions is to help the client decide among
the many choices they have. In any situation, we have the opportunity to engage
in various actions and, unfortunately, we often choose the one that is most im-
mediately rewarding, even when it does not serve our values. Values clarity helps
increase the importance of one set of actions over another. Specifically, we aim
to make immediate actions that support values more rewarding while making
actions tied to being psychologically inflexible less rewarding. As a simple ex-
ample, take a college student who has homework to complete but is also offered
the opportunity to watch videos on their computer. They can choose to engage
in an immediately reinforcing action and emotionally disengage, or emotionally
12
Values121
engage (which takes effort) and work on their studies. One action is immediately
rewarding, whereas the other is less so; one has long-term value and the other
may not. If the student can connect with what is meaningful to them about their
studies, maybe doing homework will become more rewarding. For example, if
the student could think about the career their degree will offer, the family they
could support with a stable career, and the freedom the career will give them, then
working on homework might be more meaningful relative to watching videos,
especially if watching videos then becomes associated with moving away from a
fulfilling future.
The concept of values can be new and confusing to clients, so we like to walk
them through it in a straightforward way. Here are steps we usually follow when
working on values with a client. In a previously published chapter we wrote, we
offered the following steps for starting to address values: (1) creating defusion
from social rules, (2) defining values as a concept, (3) defining personal values,
(4) choosing values, (5) determining the consistency of current actions with
values, (6) choosing goals consistent with values, and (7) behaving in accordance
with goals and values (Twohig & Crosby, 2008). In the following outline, we will
walk through how you could introduce values to a client.
1. CREATING DEFUSION FROM SOCIAL RULES
Part of the conceptualization of values is that they need to be intrinsically

motivating to the client. Things we “should” do offer a moderate level of motiva-
tion, whereas things we sincerely care about offer a high level of motivation. Thus,
we would like the client’s actions to be tied to things they genuinely care about
in order to achieve maximum motivation for action. We need to clarify values
because many clients have not thought deeply about what they value or say they
value things that others want or that seem like “correct” values. It may be helpful
to watch out for externally determined values as they will not imbue clients’ lives
with meaning and purpose and do not have the same motivating quality as freely
chosen values. Depending on the client, disentangling imposed from true values
may take time.
Clients generally will have followed patterns that work for them and connected
with values occasionally but do a mediocre job of linking actions to values. To
help the client consistently link actions to values, we need to help them become
aware of the elements of life that create their values, and offer some level of choice
as to which values they want to pursue. Remember, defusion is about seeing inner
experiences as they are, rather than as real things. Thus, a person may choose to
follow a thought or not when they are practicing defusion. Thoughts are still rele-
vant when someone is defused; defusion simply allows us to see our thoughts more
objectively. Defusion cannot detach us from the social or cultural context that
helped shape our values, but it does allow us to decide which values we ultimately
choose to follow. Intentionally identifying and pursuing values means we might
choose to keep certain patterns we have adopted in life and stop other patterns we
12
do not want to keep upon consideration. We are deliberately not giving examples
in this text, to highlight that values are chosen by the client, not the therapist,
though there are moments when a therapist should step in and clarify the client’s
value; this will be covered later in the chapter.
In the following text, we go over how one might start this conversation with a
client.
I would like to have a conversation about how we came to care about certain
things, enjoy a set of activities, participate in the groups we are in, or have the
political or religious leanings we have. What things in life have influenced
you most? [Have a discussion about this. There is no right answer. We want
the client to think about what influences them.]
Tell me how these parts of your life have influenced you in ways you are
proud of? Also, tell me how these things have affected you in ways you are
not proud of? [Again, there is no right or wrong answer. We just want the
client to see that their values are influenced by broader things in life.]
If you were to do something different in life, who would be proud of you,
and who would be upset with you for making that change? [We are trying
to help the client see that these external variables can be helpful in following
values but can also hold them back.]
And how would you feel about others’ reactions to this change?
Here is why I am asking you all these questions. Today, we are going to
talk about things that are important to you deep down. I hope we can spend
time today discussing these things and how much time you are spending on
them. Obviously, our interests and values have to come from somewhere.
This is a wonderful thing because it allows us to share interests and heritage
with family and friends. But part of this can be difficult for some people.
Sometimes, we hope for things that go against our rules about the way things
are supposed to be. Sometimes, what we want in the moment is inconsistent
with our true values. And there are times when we are interested in some-
thing but it goes against the shared interests of our social group or family.
[Again, we are not giving examples so as not to limit the scope of this dis-
cussion to our own cultural context.] What are some areas of your life where
there are strong expectations and your views don’t match up with those
perfectly?
2. DEFINING VALUES AS A CONCEPT
We like to think of targeting values as an action in which the therapist engages.

Targeting values involves anything that increases engagement in therapy and
behavior change. We usually think of this as linking current actions to delayed
but important outcomes. However, it can also include linking current actions to
smaller positive outcomes that might occur relatively soon but are delayed from
123
Values123
the moment the value-consistent action occurs. As therapists, we like to hear

about someone valuing their family and choosing to do things for them. But we
have also had the adolescent client who is not that in tune with these larger values
and currently cares about dating, friends, or popularity. We are fine with linking
important therapy actions to these more immediate and smaller values as long
as they facilitate engagement in therapy. For example, I had a young client with
trichotillomania who initially said she really cared about being pretty. While that
may not sound like an intrinsically meaningful reason for engaging in therapy, it
mattered to this client and motivated her. Therefore, we used that as a motivator
for our initial sessions. As we got further into therapy, we started to focus on
larger values that were longer-lasting, such as education and relationships. The
reason we are highlighting this issue is that values are functionally defined. That
means what the values are is less important than what the values do for the client.
Values work in ACT involves discussions about topics that increase engagement
in therapy and related actions. There are a couple other points to consider, but you
can glean them from this description we would use with a client:
We have been working on many things throughout therapy, such as how to

deal with your thoughts and feelings, and how to change your actions even
when your feelings are not on board. While we may not have chatted about
this a lot, we have been working on these other things in the hope that they
will allow you to make meaningful changes in your life. We are not about
noticing our thoughts as thoughts for its own sake. I mean, maybe it is nice,
but we want larger changes. I like to think of the reason we work in therapy
is so that we can pursue our values. Values are things we care about; they
are things that are important to us. They may not line up with how we live
or what we do, but they are what we care about. For example, I might value
taking care of the planet but not work at it every day. Conversely, I also value
family and get the chance to show that value each day. We might even value
things without doing anything about them ever or for a very long time. Just
because you are inactive in that area does not change how important it is
to you.
Values are different from goals. A goal is an action you can accomplish,
such as graduating from college. In contrast, a value is larger and can always
be pursued—even though how you pursue it will change over time. For ex-
ample, I value education, but as a professor I pursue that value differently
from when I was a student. Similarly, I might be a great dad and help with
the science fair project and spend one-on-one time with my kids. Then, the
next day rolls around and I have the opportunity to practice being a great
dad again. Things will change over our lives, and our values could shift or the
way we pursue our values could change. My children need different things
from me each year, and maybe one day they will have families of their own
and I will parent my children differently.
The last important thing is something we just discussed: There are no right
or wrong values. These are things you care about and want to spend your
124
time on. I bet they will be different from the things I value, and I do not judge
you for that. People sometimes worry that they have a “bad” value. That is
not something that comes up. All our values come from somewhere. They
might be from your family, friends, religion, television, whatever. Sometimes
we choose the same values as those of the people around us, and sometimes
we don’t. Depending on the situation, this can be easy or difficult. Sometimes
our values are part of a larger group or culture, and there are costs to having
the same ones or to not having the same ones. Remember, valuing something
is the first step; choosing how you are going to show it is another one. You
might value something but choose not to act on it because of practical life
issues. That happens, and we can talk about it. For right now, tell me about
the things that are most important to you.
3. DEFINING PERSONAL VALUES
Now that we have helped the client understand what values are, it is worthwhile
to help the client think about what they value. As mentioned earlier, clients may
be able to readily list values, but it is worth exploring if these are truly mean-
ingful directions or if they are more rules for clients to follow. One way to eluci-
date this distinction is to ask, “If no one else knew you were doing these actions,
would you still do them?” Behaviors that are about values will still be important
to the client even without external reward, because values are by definition intrin-
sically motivating. Take your time in working with your client to identify their
values; the foundation for values clarification is the acceptance and mindfulness
processes, so the discussion may be muddled or fused if clients have not practiced
those processes sufficiently. For example, clients may insist they value a certain
domain, even when they dread situations associated with it and cannot articulate
why it matters to them. In these instances, returning to defusion from social rules
or willingness to be with discomfort (e.g., guilt, shame) may, in turn, bring greater
clarity to what their values really are.
There are many forms already created that are useful in helping clients under-
stand that there are many areas one can value. There are a couple versions for
this that many people use, but this list is far from exhaustive. We like the Valued
Living Questionnaire (VLQ; Wilson, Sandoz, Kitchens, & Roberts, 2010) and
the Bull’s-Eye Values Survey (BEVS; Lundgren, Luoma, Dahl, Strosahl, & Melin,
2012). Both are validated measures with scoring systems, but they also work well
as clinical devices to help clients understand values work.
Valued Living Questionnaire (VLQ)
We like the VLQ because it facilitates a longer discussion of the client’s valued
areas of life. The VLQ lists 10 life domains most people tend to value. The client
125
Values125
is asked to talk about how they would define their value in each of the areas. This
is interesting, because most people don’t have strong values in all 10 areas. As the
client talks through each of the areas, it helps to reiterate that we do not have to
value everything. In this particular phase, we are only defining what each area
means to us. Help the client define them in big-picture terms rather than as a set
of behaviors or goals. Let’s take “Friendships/Social relations” for example; rather
than saying “spend time with friends every week” we are looking for something
larger, like “Being there for my friends during good and bad times.” It is fine if a
client says a specific area is not important to them. It is your job as the therapist
to help the client clarify what they value in each domain. This discussion can take
awhile.
Bull’s-Eye Values Survey (BEVS)
Although the BEVS has fewer items than the VLQ, it is broader in scope. You
would have the same conversation as you would with the VLQ. Ask the client
to discuss what they care about in each of the four areas. Remind them you are
looking for overarching descriptions rather than specific actions.
Many of you will work in clinics that see individuals with similar backgrounds.
There might be a set of values more relevant to your clients, and you can adjust
these main areas accordingly. You may even cross out the existing ones and write
in different ones if that makes more sense for your client.
4. CHOOSING HOW MUCH SOMETHING IS VALUED
After valued areas have been defined, work with the client on gauging how much
they value each area. For many values, this will be easy for the client. They will
know where they stand on many of these areas and feel comfortable about it.
On occasion, there will be an internal conflict with respect to how much they
care about a specific area. The client may have been engaging in activities in that
area but finding that those activities do not really fit the value. Maybe there was
pressure from an outside person or group that they should value something,
but the client does not feel that way deep down. This can be quite complicated.
Sometimes the conflict between outside pressures and personal beliefs comes
from something the client really cares about, such as culture, family, or religion.
A perfect answer to this situation does not exist. But this is why we do a fuller
examination of values closer to the end of therapy. If the acceptance and mind-
fulness processes (acceptance, defusion, self-as-context, and being present) have
been covered, an open discussion about this conflict can occur. We are referring
to significant conflicts, such as current culture conflicting with goals taken from a
previous culture, or personal views that differ from religious views—the big stuff.
This internal struggle of actually being able to pursue all our values at once shows
126
up for everyone. When the client brings up that issue, make sure to validate it.
However, stay focused on how much they care about each thing for now.
In the next section, we will talk about how much time we are going to choose to
spend on each valued domain. This conversation can be carried out with the aid
of the VLQ or BEVS or through an open discussion. We offer here a description
of how this might sound:
We just spent some time discussing what each of these areas means to you.
I think you did a nice job figuring that out. It can be a little difficult be-
cause many people have not thought about what they truly care about in
awhile. Also, what we care about changes with time. We have new priorities
or maybe start to value different things. Again, I think you did a nice job
wading through some of that. Next, I’d like to talk about how much you care
about—or value—each of these areas. I’d like you to tell me whether you
value this at a low or high level. We can also go from 1 to 10, whatever you
like. I just want you to have the opportunity to tell me how important each
of these areas is to you.
There is one catch here. I want honest answers from you. This can be dif-
ficult because there are lots of pressures inside your head as we talk about
this. As we talked about earlier, there were many people and groups telling
you how things should be. This is a wonderful and problematic thing—like
the chatter in our minds. Some of the suggestions you have received in
life fit for you and some don’t. Maybe some don’t fit for you but they are
still honestly important to you. I can’t be in your head, but I want you to
try and be honest with yourself as you rate these areas. I fully expect it to
be a little difficult and for there to be a little struggle in your head as you
rate some of these areas. We are not talking about changing any actions at
this time, so there is no consequence to what you say. It might be useful to
think of answering these questions as if nobody was listening and nobody
would judge.
Our only warning is to not judge the client’s choices. This is a discussion. The
client has been working through these issues in their head for a while, and it
would be a shame if the first time they admitted it aloud they were shot down.
Validate the emotional struggle that is occurring; you do not have to validate the
action. There will be a little more on this at the end of this chapter in the section
on “problematic” values.
5. DETERMINING THE CONSISTENCY OF CURRENT

ACTIONS WITH VALUES
The next step is easily covered using the VLQ or BEVS. The VLQ has one sheet
where the client rates how much they care about each of the values. There is a
127
Values127
second sheet, which looks the same as the first except the instructions ask how well
their actions match how much they care about their value. It is basically asking,
“Based on how much you care about this issue, how well are you doing on a daily
basis?” This is where all the previous discussions start to pay off. Hopefully, the
client understands that values are complicated and that they change throughout
life. They are based on our histories and individual differences, and we can use
them to guide us when making large and small decisions. Again, if some of the
acceptance and mindfulness processes are in place, then the client is more likely
to be honest about where their actions and their values do not line up. We would
describe this to the client as follows:
You could probably guess this next step was coming, but now let’s look at
how your values and day-to-day actions line up. We just talked about how
much you value each of the areas we defined. Now let’s talk about how well
your actions match up with how much you care about the various areas. This
can be a little tricky, but you will get it. Let’s say you value something very
little and you spend no time on that value. In that case, your values and your
actions line up. Now, if you value something highly, and you spend next to
no time in that area, your values and actions don’t line up. There can also be
a midway situation, where you might value something a lot, and do a little in
that area, but not quite as much as you’d like. Then this is an area for some
improvement.
Going over this can be difficult for some people. It can have its re-
warding moments—like when you notice that you are doing really well
in an area. But there will also be times when you feel uncomfortable be-
cause your actions and your values don’t match. I have a couple thoughts
about that. First, be easy on yourself. We all do this. Nobody’s values and
actions line up perfectly. Second, maybe living in that state of tension be-
tween how you choose to live and your values is the best place to be. If
you were to go 100% into any value, there would not be enough time or
energy to do the other ones as fully as you want. Maybe that is how life is.
We figure out what is most important to us and do our best to meet our
expectations, but we will never fully be there. Finally, that discomfort you
feel from being away from where you want to be values-wise might mean
something. Remember, internal experiences are indicators that something
is going on. Maybe that something is meaningless, maybe you need to
do the opposite of the feeling, or maybe it tells you to go for it and you
can follow that emotion. The other day, I had two commitments, and had
some guilt about skipping one but not about the other. When I paused
to connect with my values, I could tell one was more consistent with my
values and the other was more for immediate gratification, so I made a
shift. In that case, the guilt signaled to me that I cared more about one of
the commitments.
128
Let’s go over each one of these values and you can rate how consistent your
actions are with how important they are to you.
6. CHOOSING GOALS CONSISTENT WITH VALUES
Now that you and the client have found discrepancies between actions and values,
the two of you can work on doing something about it. Ask the client to tell you
about the areas where their actions and values differ. Ask them if any of these
differences are meaningful to them. It is possible that the gap between their value
and action is planned. Maybe things are occurring in life that makes that so. Still,
a conversation about the discrepancy is meaningful.
Identify areas where the values–actions discrepancy is meaningful to the
client (i.e., they want it to be different). Discuss what internal experiences
are getting in the way of their pursuing the value. Also, discuss real-life issues
that are in the way, such as access to things or time. The internal-experience
part is important because this is where some of the psychological flexibility
discussion will come in. The client should be able to describe when fear or
frustration gets in the way of their being able to do the things they care about.
This may lead to prolonged conversations about the acceptance and mindful-
ness processes.
There will also be practical challenges. To some extent, you may be able to
offer some guidance on how to fix these external issues, but chances are the
client has thought of many of them. Putting the ideas into action has probably
been the difficult part. Most likely, inner experiences about the outside world
are the largest barrier—for example, thoughts about not having enough time,
not doing it well enough, or it not being time to start working on it. These are
cognitions about the world that may or may not represent the way the world
actually is. For example, when someone feels they do not have time, they may
not have a lot of free time, but there is always time to make small changes. This
is the time to help the client decide what changes to start making. It could be
discussed as follows:
After looking at the differences between your values and actions, which areas
do you want to work on?
What external obstacles come to mind when you think about making
these changes?
What fears or other concerns come to your mind when you think about
making these changes?
Let’s think about small changes you can make that would move you closer
to this value. It will not get you to where you want to be—which may not
be possible anyway—but it will move you one step in that direction. I like
to think of this as data plotted on a graph. The trend can be increasing,
decreasing, or constant. We are hoping for an increase in values-consistent
129
Values129
actions, no matter how slight. If you work at it, even slight changes will even-
tually add up to a lot.
7. BEHAVING IN ACCORDANCE WITH GOALS

AND VALUES
In this last step, have the client agree to engage in an action that supports one of
their values. When choosing this action, pick something with a 90% chance of
occurring. We would greatly prefer it gets accomplished than it be huge. Also, re-
mind the client that half the point of the behavioral commitment is to engage in
more valued action, but the other half is to practice psychological flexibility skills
in difficult situations. We like to remind people that they may focus on either
aspect during the exercise. Sometimes, the action feels motivating. Other times,
it is more aversive and it is hard for clients to connect to their value during the
activity. In the latter situation, we can find meaning in building our psychological
flexibility. The last thing we stress is to be flexible with the agreement. We want
the client to follow through on what was agreed on, but if they cannot make the
commitment happen, they can do something functionally similar. For example,
if the client agrees to look into jobs but their internet is down, they could update
their résumé instead.
VALUES ARE GUIDES
Our favorite aspect of values is that they can keep guiding action well past the
therapy phase. Values can be used as a guide to make daily decisions. In any situ-
ation the client is in, they can ask themselves whether this action is about moving
toward something meaningful (i.e., a value) or about altering some emotion.
Then, they can use this information to adjust their behavior accordingly. Values
are also useful when a client is stuck. During that stuck moment, the client can
look at which action will further a value. All other issues aside, the client should
choose the action consistent with their value.
WHAT ABOUT PROBLEMATIC VALUES?
When we are teaching at the university or are training offsite, we usually get
asked what to do if a client has a value that is antisocial, such as harming chil-
dren. Honestly, this is very unlikely to happen. We have never had a client who
presented with such a disturbing value. If it were to happen and the disturbing
value is not the result of psychological inflexibility, you are welcome to inform the
client there are ethical issues in addressing that value, but they can work on many
other values.
130
The more likely situation is the client’s value comes from a psychologically in-
flexible place. It would hurt too much for the client to answer honestly, so they
give the answer that is consistent with their behavior—even though their behavior
belies their actual value. Most of the time, the person does not do this consciously.
This is just a pattern the person has been in and they have a hard time noticing
and stopping it.
If you see this occurring, prolong the discussion on that value. Questions like,
“What would you say about this value if nobody would hear your answer?” or
“What would you choose if nobody ever saw you do this?” Another way to get in-
formation about the reasons behind that choice is to ask, “What scares you about
doing something different in this area?” If you have a good relationship with the
client, you can even say, “I’m not sure about what you just said. Part of that does
not ring true given everything I know about you.” Even “Tell me about that” can
get the conversation going. I know challenging a client’s values is a bit grandiose,
but this is our profession and sometimes we can tell if something is off.
For the behavioral commitment this week, try to have your client independently
set a goal based on a value they identified this session. As usual, use the Behavioral
Commitment Worksheet (see Appendix C) as your template. If appropriate, ask
your client to select a goal outside their comfort zone that they might not have
thought to work on before today. Setting slightly more challenging behavioral
commitments will tell you how well your client is able to use the skills they have
been building in novel situations. These data will, in turn, help you determine
how ready your client is for therapy termination. Given the emphasis on values
this session, you might even start out the homework discussion with asking your
client to choose the value on which they want to actively work, rather than an ac-
tion. Once they have identified a value, ask them to generate actions linked to the
value. From there, narrow down the behaviors by asking your client which one
would be most meaningful for them to do this week. Make sure your questions
are only guiding the decision-making process; you want your client to be able to
think through these same steps (i.e., choose value, brainstorm actions consistent
with the value, select specific action, do the action) when they are making choices
outside therapy.
SESSION SUMMARY
This session focused on values. Through reviewing the homework, you should
have been able to identify where your client is still struggling and to work on those
processes before moving on to values. If your client seems to have a good grasp on
the other processes, you can begin values work by defining and clarifying values.
Once you and your client have identified their values, you can segue into evaluating
13
Values131
behavioral consistency with values and goal setting. As you are approaching the
end of therapy, your client might be setting their own homework at this point, and
your job is to ensure that they are set up for sustainable success (e.g., by linking
actions to values, monitoring the size of behavioral commitments).
REFERENCES
Lundgren, T., Luoma, J. B., Dahl, J., Strosahl, K. D., & Melin, L. (2012). The Bull’s-Eye
Values Survey: A psychometric evaluation. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 19(4),
518–526. doi:10.1016/j.cbpra.2012.01.004
Twohig, M. P. & Crosby, J. M. (2008). Values clarification. In W. T. O’Donohue and J.
E. Fisher (Eds.), Cognitive behavior therapy: Applying empirically supported prac-
tice techniques in your practice (2nd ed.) (pp. 583-588). Hoboken NY: John Wiley
& Sons. Also appears in W. T. O’Donohue and J. E. Fisher (Eds.), General principles
and empirically supported techniques of cognitive behavior therapy (pp. 681–686).
Hoboken NY: John Wiley & Sons.
Wilson, K. G., Sandoz, E. K., Kitchens, J., & Roberts, M. (2010). The Valued Living
Questionnaire: Defining and measuring valued action within a behavioral frame-
work. The Psychological Record, 60, 249–272. doi:10.1007/BF03395706
132
13
10
Session 10
Values and Behavioral Commitments
We have hopefully built up the acceptance and mindfulness processes by now and
are shifting to helping the client use those skills to engage in meaningful activi-
ties. We want therapy set up in a way that these skills continue after sessions are
over. In this session, we review homework and the values discussion from the last
week, and we help the client where we can. Then, we will build on values work and
clarify behavioral commitments with the client.
REVIEW HOMEWORK
As in every session, you should review the homework from last week, focusing on
behavioral changes the client worked on and how well they practiced psycholog-
ical flexibility while enacting those changes. In this session, pay particular atten-
tion to the client’s connection to their values and whether their actions were more
influenced by what they care about in life or by their emotional experience. The
client was likely able to stay in touch with their values for part of the exercise but
then lost that connection later on. Here is how this conversation might go:
Therapist (T): Last week we discussed engaging in actions tied to things

you care about. Sometimes this is easy—like when your excitement
and motivation are high. There are other times when you don’t feel so
motivated to do it. We talked about how connecting with values can help
people find meaning in their actions. Nevertheless, even when there is
meaning to the action, you can experience a variety of emotions—which
can make the action more difficult. I would like to hear about what you
worked on last week. How were you connected with your values, and
how did you handle any difficult experiences that showed up during the
activity?
134
Client (C): We agreed I would show courage and stand up for myself at
work three times. We talked about how actual events could look dif-
ferent because I feel small or put down in different situations each
week, although issues with one coworker are common. I found a couple
opportunities to work on this. First, I was in a meeting and we were
discussing solutions to a problem. I had an idea, a solution. Then my
mind started racing about sounding dumb, about what I was going to
say, and on and on. In this moment, I recognized this was what we were
talking about. I was given the chance to practice living while afraid.
T: Tell me what you did.
C: I offered my idea. It came out fine. I’m not the most amazing speaker but
I did fine, and people seemed to appreciate my idea.
T: What did you do with your fear and anxiety during this event?
C: I think I did a good job handling it. It was like a bully at a playground.
It kept poking at me, but I just let it be and did not engage with it. It was
still annoying and I wished it was not there, but by not engaging with it
too much, I could get through my meeting pretty well.
T: Were you in touch with why you were doing this? Another way of asking
my question is: Were you aware of your values in this moment and did
they affect you in any way?
C: That is a good question. I’m not sure. I knew I wanted to do this differ-
ently and was not pleased with how I had been handling these situations
in the past. I was motivated to do this differently, but I think the last time
I really linked my actions with my values was in our discussion during
the session.
T: This leads me to my final question: If you were in a situation like this in
the future, would you want to speak up or stay quiet?
C: There is no question I am glad I spoke up. I am pleased I got my opinion
out there. I also think this will help me in my career. People who offer
useful things seem to get more opportunities at my office. I’m not all
about advancing, but I’d like the option.
T: This point goes back to one of our first sessions. Remember when
I offered two games you could play? The first one was unfair and you
played for emotional comfort. The second was fair and you played for
better quality of life. It sounds like you played the second game. I hope
you can hold on to what it was like to intentionally play for better quality
of life because this information can be useful.
It is worth noting, it could have been possible that this client presented her
idea at the meeting and the group disagreed with her. She might have felt sad and
had thoughts about how she often has bad ideas. Prior to our clients practicing
behavioral commitments, we should warn them that we cannot predict how be-
havioral commitments will go. Sometimes they go really well, sometimes poorly,
and sometimes they land somewhere in between. But if the action is based on a
value, it is likely worth trying. The fact that it did not go well can just teach us
135
Values and Behavioral Commitments135
something about how we might do it next time, or whether that is the way we
will choose to pursue the value next time. Maybe the client needs to work on her
public speaking skills, idea formulation, or timing of offering ideas. Thus, even if
her idea had been shot down, the event was a success because she followed her
values and learned something about the situation.
The information you get from a discussion like this tells you how well your client
is doing in these areas. Again, use the ACT ADVISOR (Figure 2.2.) to determine
which processes need more attention as you gather information from your client.
For example, based on this example, we would say the client is doing mediocre in
terms of values clarity and doing well in terms of behavioral commitments. Thus,
you would want to spend more time covering values this session.
REACTIONS TO VALUES FROM LAST WEEK
As we have done with the other processes, we want to check in on values and see
how the client is doing on this process. If we had to simplify what we want clients
to work on in values work, it would be these two things: (1) to clarify what is
important to them and (2) to get in touch with their values and choose to head
toward them rather than toward emotional control in moments when they would
usually engage in emotional control. Thus, check in with the client on how pre-
sent their values are in their day-to-day actions, and whether they are checking
in with their values when making decisions. You could ask about values by saying
something like this:
T: Last week, when we went over your values, you talked about things like
family, work, religion, and your friends and how these were the key
things in your life right now. I got the sense that your day-to-day activ-
ities were pretty focused on dealing with your anxiety and you were not
spending as much time and energy on these values as you would like.
Was this week any different?
C: I am not sure I was thinking about these things differently, but I did more
things I care about. Maybe I remembered to stop running from anxiety
but forgot to think about what I was moving toward.
T: That leads to a little more “white knuckling.”
C: I think you are right. I did it, but it was difficult.
T: You are moving in a good direction. Let’s talk about putting all these
pieces together.
BEING OPEN TO THINGS YOU HATE, TO GET THINGS

YOU WANT
When we think about how cognitions affect our actions, one of the biggest things
is that our thoughts can make things we once enjoyed aversive and make things
136
we once found aversive enjoyable or worth approaching. For example, the feelings
associated with vigorous exercise would be considered scary in a different con-
text. Feeling out of breath, sore, sick, and tired are sought after if one is training
for an event or otherwise trying to build fitness. Most of us have done kind things
for friends or loved ones that were objectively unpleasant but we found meaning
in those acts because we were helping someone we care about. We want to ac-
complish something similar in this section of treatment. We want to help the
client link the difficult steps involved in therapy to their personal values so that
the difficulties experienced in therapy are connected to something meaningful.
We want to change the context in which inner and outer experiences occur such
that even though certain actions continue to be objectively difficult, they also be-
come seen as meaningful. The following example illustrates how this might be
described.
T: Tell me about one of the worst places you have ever been. I don’t mean
for you to tell me about one of the worst times of your life, but what is
one of the most miserable situations you have ever been in? I’m not really
looking for a trauma or something like that. I’m looking for something
that was more of a chore. I have two that come to mind I want to share
as examples. The first was when my wife and I decided we would do a
backpacking trip through this lovely part of Wisconsin where we used
to live. The trip got delayed because of rain, but after the rain stopped,
we headed out. Wisconsin has mosquitoes and we were used to that, but
something about that rain and that trail brought them out in clouds. We
had been dropped off and pretty much had to get to the next spot by
ourselves, so we had to walk all day through clouds of mosquitoes. That
was rough. The other one was when my wife and I took a long flight to
Sweden—it was really long with all the connections. We get to Sweden at
like 7:00 a.m. and could not check in until 3:00 p.m. We were exhausted
and had to wander the town without a shower for 8 hours until we could
check in. That was rough, too. Tell me about one of your memories
like that.
C: I had one where I was trapped in an airport because of weather and poor
plane scheduling for like 48 hours. I had on the same clothes, slept on
the floor for two nights, had to deal with screaming children. . . . It was
terrible.
T: Great. That is the kind of suffering I am looking for. What would you say
if I asked you whether you would go through that event again?
C: No way!
T: Right. There is no value in it. We need a reason. Name something in life
that is very important to you.
C: My kids.
T: If I could promise that your kids would be healthy, at least through col-
lege, but you had to live that event again, would you do it?
C: Of course.
137
T: Would you do it every year if I offered that your children would

be healthy for that year? You’d have to do this every year of your
life, but they would have no major health problems as long as you
committed to it.
C: Of course.
T: I want you to see a few things here. You immediately said that you would
do it. There was no question about it. This is one of the most unpleasant
events you have ever gone through, and you were sure you would do it
again for your children. This is the power of values. While values are not
a cure-all, connecting with values can give meaning to difficult situations.
If you need to do something and don’t feel like it, see if you can find
something about the task that is consistent with your values. I find it
helpful to find and connect with different motivating aspects of an ac-
tivity. For example, if I’m doing homework with my kids and they are
whining, I can connect with giving my wife a break from this job or con-
nect with helping my kids live a slightly better life because they under-
stand this material. Usually, connecting with the purpose of an activity
makes it easier for me to practice willingness with my frustrations in the
moment.
DISCUSSION OF BEHAVIORAL COMMITMENTS
Behavioral commitments are the “final” process of change in ACT, although,

technically, your client has already been practicing them through homework
assignments since the second session. Behavioral commitments are the one area
where you know more about how to implement ACT than we do. This is where you
integrate the skills you already know are useful in your specific area. For example,
someone who struggles with social interactions would likely benefit from social
skills training, whereas someone diagnosed with a substance use disorder would
benefit from techniques such as scheduled smoking or fading of use amounts.
Exposure exercises are a key part of the treatment of anxiety disorders, and they
can be done in an ACT-consistent manner. Lots of people with regimented med-
ical issues can benefit from learning psychological flexibility in addition to the
steps for managing their medical issue.
Working from an ACT approach means your client should connect with their
values and practice other elements of psychological flexibility while engaging in
behavior change. The combination of these two skills is key to making mean-
ingful and lasting change. Other aspects to note when discussing behavioral
commitments include the following: (1) any size step is great as long as it is a step
in a valued direction, (2) not to base the activity on distress or emotional level,
and (3) be present while engaging in the activity (these specific points were cov-
ered in Chapter 5). In the following sections, we will go over key points we like to
cover with clients, using text addressed to clients.
138
Think of it like a graph (slowly going up or down)
I’d like to spend a little time talking about following your values and acting on
your behavior change plans. One thing that happens when people look at their
end goal or where they want to be is that it feels overwhelming. It’s like showing
up at college and thinking about graduating. There are so many steps you need to
take care of and it feels like there isn’t time for large road bumps. Graduating from
college can seem overwhelming when we think of it as one big step. It is fine that it
feels overwhelming; your brain is just doing what it does. It’s predicting the future
and going through all the issues that can occur. We just need to find a better way
to handle this struggle.
I like to think about what we are doing here as a graph like one you’d see for
stocks or a business. All we want is for the graph to be going in the right direction.
If we are working on more engagement with family, then I am not particularly
concerned with where we start. I just hope we can keep increasing things week by
week. If we are working on stopping smoking cigarettes, then I hope that number
goes down a little bit week by week. If we can keep making little changes, we will
eventually get there. Don’t forget, we spent a really long time building up this pat-
tern; we are welcome to spend a long time going the other way.
One last thing: Other groups don’t get this slow change as much as those
of us in mental health do. We see slow change with every client we work with
because we are teaching a set of new skills. Learning new things takes time
and practice. I would never ask you to learn algebra, another language, or to
dance, quickly. These things take practice and feedback, and more practice and
more feedback. Learning how to live differently is the same. This is going to
take time. So, when outside groups such as your church, family, friends, and
coworkers don’t understand this, don’t blame them. They might think of this
like a class where you get the information and now you know it. They might
not get that this is learning a whole new set of skills that you get to use in a
thousand situations.
Small steps
As I just said, shoot for getting better instead of getting there. There are many
things in life that have no shortcut. Changing how you live is a slow process. Focus
on whether this week was better than last week, or whether this month was better
than last month. Sorry to use a dog as an example, but we just adopted a 3-year-
old Chihuahua. She had some skills but was lacking a ton of them. The most an-
noying behavior was that she went after our cat every time the cat was around;
she was totally out of control. I worked at it every day by rewarding behaviors
I wanted to see from the dog, and a little for the cat if she stayed in the room. That
whole first week was a mess. The second week had some good moments but many
rough ones. The third week started to have more good moments than bad, and so
on. If you asked me on any one day, I might have been pretty negative about her
139
progress. But if we graphed it, we would have seen the average day improving.
If you keep working at it and taking steps in your direction, you will slowly
make changes. I don’t know when you will get there. Focus on the journey—and
someday you will be at a place you are proud of—even if it can be hard to know
when and where that place will be.
Steps are toward values rather than away from emotions
This is one of the largest takeaways from ACT. There are a few general rules one can
implement on a daily basis that work out positively, and this is one of them. Here
it is: Make actions about pursuing values rather than regulating emotion. As with all
rules, this rule will not be helpful at times, but, in general, our clients would benefit
from focusing their actions on pursuing values instead of on regulating emotions.
If a client is ever unsure about what to do in life, they can go back to this rule.
If there was one part I hope you take away from our conversation on values
and behavior change, it would be to make your actions about pursuing your
values rather than moving away from unwanted inner experiences. If we
could somehow shift all action that was for emotional control to something
that you cared about, think about how much you could get accomplished
and how different your life would be. It is a simple shift.
Make this a way of life
My final suggestion is to find a way to keep this going after our sessions.
One of the powerful things about therapy is that you have to check in with
someone every week. This work stays on your mind every day because
someone is going to ask you about it. I hope you can keep the pedal down
a little bit. Each person needs to find their own way of doing it. We will talk
about this more next week, but make maintaining your mental health a part
of your life. If you are not moving in the direction you want to be moving
in, think about what you need to be working on. You might be buying into
thoughts, running from emotion, or not being present with important things.
Spend time on those issues and make small plans for how you are going to
keep moving in a valued direction.
Just like every other week, have your client make plans for behavior change using
the Behavioral Commitment Worksheet (see Appendix C). By this time, your client
should be proficient at identifying a values-consistent behavioral commitment and
a specific process of change that they think would be helpful to work on. Given
140
that you are coming to the end of therapy, we recommend letting your client take
the lead here. Giving your client space to think through an appropriate behavioral
commitment is also a chance for you to conduct a quick assessment of whether
they are prepared to sustain behavior change going forward. For example, if they
readily identify a goal and skill that follow from what you two have discussed in
recent sessions, this reflects self-awareness and ability to set goals independent
from your guidance. However, if your client struggles to select a goal or identifies
one that is about emotion regulation, you will need to revisit previous material.
Notes for final session
If you get the sense that your client is ready for treatment termination, ask them
to think through a couple points over the next week: (1) How am I going to keep
up behavior change? (2) What do I still need to work on? Their answers to these
questions will provide useful data for determining how likely they will be able to
maintain therapeutic gains.
SESSION SUMMARY
The focus of this session is to explicitly link continued behavioral commitments

and values. We hope the client can continue to make notable behavioral
commitments tied to values, and that these behavioral commitments move the
client in important directions. If this work can keep going, we predict the client
will make notable strides in life. In the next session, you will work to encourage
the client to keep up with their successes after therapy termination.
14
11
Session 11
Maintaining Growth
REVIEW HOMEWORK
As this is the last session, the homework review process should be driven more by
your client. That is, they should be bringing up areas in which they were successful
or struggled with minimal therapist prompting. Their ability to identify these
areas will help them troubleshoot and sustain behavioral changes going forward.
The homework from the previous session was designed to focus more on behav-
ioral commitments so that your client could start to build up new, more values-
consistent patterns of action. See if your client has done so. Ask questions that
will guide them to think about how they will work on behavioral commitments
without having a therapist with whom to check in weekly. Examples of such
questions include the following:
• What will you do with that challenge the next time it shows up?
• How will you keep up your progress?
• What was it like to take this step toward your values? How will you keep
taking steps in this direction?
• What if anxiety gets really high? What will you do then?
• What if your mind tells you “you’re not good enough” or “you don’t
deserve a better life”?
These questions are also a way for you to assess where your client is on the ACT
ADVISOR (Figure 2.2) or the six ACT processes of change. You will need this in-
formation to shape your last session, helping your client build on their strengths
and brainstorming ways they can improve skills deficits. Note that termination
is not about being 100% psychologically flexible; we believe termination is indi-
cated when your client is prepared to continue practicing psychological flexibility
independently. After all, even the most seasoned ACT therapists have their rigid
moments.
142
ASK WHAT HAS BEEN THE MOST USEFUL PAR T

OF THERAPY
This is consistent with what we have been talking about throughout this book. If
people could actually pay attention to the contingencies occurring around them
and respond in ways that take advantage of those contingencies, they would likely
be functioning pretty well. Thus, it can be useful to have the client look back at the
contingencies and see what responses have produced the most useful results. You
may ask your client a few of the following questions and see what they say.
• As we wrap up, I find it useful to think about the new things you have
tried. I would like to know what you found useful or not useful.
• What change have you made that has had the biggest impact on
your life?
• What thing have you stopped doing that has improved things for
you most?
• What surprised you most in our work together?
• What are you definitely going to keep doing as time moves forward?
ASK WHERE THE CLIENT PREDICTS THEY WILL

GET STUCK
Based on your client’s answers to the previous questions and your conceptuali-
zation of them over your time together, talk with them about how they are going
to deal with instances of psychological inflexibility that will come up for them
in the future. The client likely knows where they have generally experienced
improvements and areas where they continue to struggle. Help the client see
that these situations will come up and that they are not negative; they are part of
facilitating behavior change. Give the client some guidance on additional resources
they can use to handle their struggles, such as a mobile app or a book. These re-
sources can help clients continue to practice psychological flexibility and apply
it to new challenges after therapy has ended. For example, a client who struggles
with family issues and who is attending a wedding in a few months might want to
read a self-help book leading into the wedding and focus on triggers that will be
at the wedding. If things get harder for a student when the semester starts up, then
make plans for how the client will focus on maintaining psychological flexibility
when the time comes.
REMINDER ABOUT MOVING IN THE RIGHT DIRECTION
Now is a great time to remind the client about something we discussed at the
beginning of treatment: Reduction in internal experience is not the objective;
143
Maintaining Growth143
moving in valued directions is. It can be easy to forget that outside of sessions. The
communities in which we live generally focus on how we are feeling. As discussed
at other points in the book, how we are doing internally is important and inter-
esting, but it makes for a poor indicator of treatment progress. It is sort of akin
to what we are finding about health and weight. Yes, lower weight is generally
associated with better health, but increasingly we are finding that what we do is
much more important, and much more controllable, than how much we weigh.
One can eat healthy and exercise a lot but have a high body mass index (BMI).
Similarly, someone could have a low BMI but be sedentary, eat poorly, and have
poor health. Thus, a better indicator of health is probably what we do (e.g., diet,
activity, no smoking), rather than numbers on a scale, which may or may not
change. The same goes for internal experiences and overt actions: We can behave
how we choose, and what happens internally may not mean a lot.
Remind the client that we are thinking similarly about their mental health. We
are focusing on how one is living on a day-to-day basis over any particular level
of internal experience. For example, someone who experiences depression might
find that no matter how they live their life, they experience some depression. It is
likely lower when they are living a values-consistent life, but it may still be present.
It might be similar if a loved one is struggling with a significant stressor: They may
have distress over it, but the distress does not have to negatively affect the person
or interfere with their actions. We would argue it is more important to focus one’s
energy on responding effectively to the distress than to try to eliminate the dis-
tress. Thus, you might say something like this to your client:
Therapist (T): Tell me about how things have shifted for you in terms
of your treatment goals. In particular, I am curious about how you see
having less anxiety versus living an enjoyable life.
Client (C): I used to be really focused on experiencing less anxiety.
Actually, it was the only goal I could think of. Through our weeks to-
gether, I have come to experience that my anxiety and what I do on a
given day are somewhat related but not totally related. I used to think
anxiety caused the action, but I am feeling more and more that the rela-
tionship between anxiety and what I do is loose.
T: Tell me more.
C: I used to plan my days around how I felt. And then, I usually felt de-
pressed on top of anxious because I was not being active. Now, I choose
what I want to do each day and let my emotions come along with me. My
anxiety is still present, but some days it is a little lower. My experience of
depression is certainly less. One odd thing I have found is I am putting
myself in anxiety-provoking situations more frequently, so that has been
interesting in terms of how much anxiety I feel. It is almost as though the
more fun stuff in life is also more anxiety-provoking.
T: OK. So what do you think this tells us about how you should look at how
you are doing over the next year?
C: What do you mean?
14
T: Should you be paying attention to your anxiety or how you are living
day-to-day?
C: How I am living.
T: OK. What is going to get in your way of doing that?
C: Oh, just falling into old routines.
T: Yes, you’ll have to keep an eye on that. We’ll talk about this more later,
but a simple reminder, like keeping this appointment time in your cal-
endar, can be a nice way to tell yourself to check in and see how you are
doing with your anxiety and valued living.
ASK CLIENT TO SET WEEKLY REMINDERS IN CALENDAR
We strongly believe in the “power of the appointment.” Just having someone to

check in with every week can keep us on track. We often tell clients to keep the
weekly appointment in their calendars. We suggest the client pause for a moment
when the appointment is normally scheduled and ask themselves, “How did I do
this last week?” It is worth thinking about, whether they are on a positive trajec-
tory or a negative one.
PROVIDING RESOURCES POST-T HERAPY
There are a number of non-therapist options (e.g., books, mobile apps, websites)
to keep the practice of psychological flexibility going. You can find a list of re-
sources formatted as a handout you can give your clients in Appendix H, at the
end of the book.
TELL CLIENT “MY DOOR IS OPEN”
It has always surprised me how much self-stigma people feel with respect to
therapy. We understand attending therapy is difficult. It certainly can make
someone feel as though they have made mistakes or are “broken” and are there-
fore in need of therapy. Hopefully, this fusion with self-stories has lessened and
the client can see that they are not their self-evaluations. Thus, their resistance to
coming into therapy might be weaker.
The second issue is that the client might have a sense that they have already
worked on this particular issue and therefore should not need any more assis-
tance with it. But we know that is not how anxiety, depression, and other difficult
inner experiences work. We can get better at responding to them, and we can still
have times when we are poor at responding to them. During those times, it can be
helpful to get some guidance on how to deal with what one is experiencing.
It would be nice if our clients could see us similarly to how they see other health
professionals, such as a dentist, general practitioner, or ophthalmologist. We are
145
not saying there should be annual psychotherapy checkups, but for most of us,
there is no stigma associated with going for a dental cleaning, a physical exam, or
an eye exam. Yet, we have noticed that many of our clients feel stigma about their
first visit to a mental health professional and even the visits after that. Thus, it is
worth talking about your willingness to work with the client again in the future
should it be needed. You might say something like this:
T: I just want you to know you are very welcome to come back in for
booster sessions if you feel you are falling into old patterns. Sometimes,
people are responding to their internal events really well and doing a nice
job of following their values and for some reason they slip up. Somehow,
they get off-track. Rather than continuing down that road of “I lost it; it
didn’t stick,” just come back in for a few more sessions. We can work on
getting you back on track.
C: Thanks for saying that. I hope I don’t fail at this, though. I’m feeling
pretty good right now.
T: Yes, and I want to emphasize coming back in here is not a sign of failure.
Take exercising and eating healthy, for example. If someone fell off the
wagon in those areas, we wouldn’t say they lost it and failed. We’d say
they need to get back on track. They might get a personal trainer, pair
up with a friend for workouts, use an app, or just generally recommit.
Do you think you can look at how you are handling your anxiety the
same way?
C: Yes. I mean, I had not really thought about it too much, but I never ex-
pected to come back in here. I sort of saw this as a thing that I came here
and fixed.
T: OK, then it is good we are discussing this. My guess is you will continue
to have ups and downs in your life. Maybe you will be ready for the
downs and maybe you won’t. If you find yourself in a situation where you
are struggling to respond or find you are not handling things the way you
want, just contact me and we can get you back on track. Usually, some-
where between two and four sessions is what is needed to do this. Think
of me like your doctor, dentist, or ophthalmologist. They help you in
their specific areas. I want to be the person who helps you in the mental
health area.
C: Cool. Sounds good.
SAY GOODBYE AND THANK CLIENT
I (M.P.T.) am going to credit Jason Luoma for teaching me this next piece. We
have emphasized modeling throughout all other aspects of therapy. Now that we
are at the very last few pages, let’s keep that up. Ending therapy can be a unique
and sometimes uncomfortable experience. You just had a fairly close relationship
with another person. You probably learned a lot about them. They likely told you
146
things they have told very few—if any—other people, and now you have to say
goodbye. And it might be for forever. It is unusual in our lives to build such a close
relationship with someone and then say, “This will likely be the last time we see
each other.” Be honest that you may never see your client again.
Ending therapy is not complicated, but it can be emotionally difficult. As this
book is ACT in Steps, we suggest wrapping up with these few steps: (1) be honest
that ending therapy is weird, (2) thank the client for what you can sincerely thank
them for, (3) give them the space to say any parting words they need to say, and
(4) say goodbye. These are just suggestions, because how you end therapy is a mul-
tifaceted issue and depends on your work setting, population, preferences, and so
on. The important part is to remain consistent with an ACT approach, ending this
relationship in a way that models and instills openness and meaning to the work
being done.
Step 1: Be honest that ending therapy can

be uncomfortable
We suggest saying something like this:
Ending therapy is always odd no matter how many times I do it. I feel like
we’ve become close and certainly come to know each other quite well. We
have talked about things you probably don’t talk about with many people.
And now we will wrap up our relationship. It is possible—or even likely—we
won’t see each other again. Not many relationships are this way. And we can
roll with this. We don’t need to pretend we will catch up again. I hope you
have benefitted from our work together. I will be here if you would ever like
to have booster sessions, but if not, that is totally fine.
Step 2: Thank them for what you can sincerely thank

them for
Be genuine. It can be tempting to say overly positive things about your client be-
cause you are parting ways, but do not be insincere. If you were not inspired by
your client’s courage, do not say that. Yet, we do recommend taking a few moments
before your last session with a client to pause and consider how this work has been
meaningful and what you have appreciated or learned in working with this client.
Here is a version of what we usually say:
I learn something from everyone I work with. The things I learned from you
and watching the way you worked through your fears will help me with the
next client who is in a similar position. I appreciated how hard you worked
in therapy and the ways you kept going even when it was not easy. Therapy is
difficult and you did a great job at it. I just want to thank you for allowing me
147
to work with you. I know you hired me, but it was a worthwhile experience
for me, too. We are coming up on time (or have finished the work for this
session) and I want to give you the chance to say anything you want to say to
me before we wrap up.
Step 3: Give them the space to say any parting words

they need to say
This is how a relationship should end: with the space to express how each party
has perceived the relationship. This is how real relationships work, and it is good
for you to model that to the client. It would be easier to just say “goodbye,” but you
might as well do it the right way.
Step 4: Say goodbye
If you are a new therapist, there are things you will want to work through, such as
what to do if a client brings a gift, wants to hug you goodbye, and so on. Our only
suggestion is to model psychological flexibility as you navigate these things. If a
client brings you a gift and you think it would be unethical to take it, be honest
with the client and talk about how you feel. That modeling will go a long way for
that client. The last step generally is to say goodbye, as an acknowledgment that
your work together is finished, at least for the time being.
SESSION SUMMARY
In this last session you focused on how to help your client maintain the changes
they have made, identifying what has worked well and a plan for future areas
where they may get stuck. You likely gave them additional resources, helped them
set reminders, and left the door open for future work. Finally, you brought the
ACT processes to bear in saying goodbye to your client and ending your course
of work with them.
148
149
APPENDIX A
General ACT Principles
1. Be experiential. That is, talk about your client’s real-life struggles

and the thoughts and feelings that come along with those
struggles. Try to bring difficult inner experiences that occur
outside of session into the therapy room.
2. Create a psychologically flexible context for your client. Teach, model,
and act like it is OK to have all sorts of inner experiences.
• Disclosures can be a useful means of modeling psychological
flexibility.
• Talk about inner experiences in an ACT-consistent way (e.g.,
transient, inherently powerless over actions, neither good nor bad).
3. Trust that your client’s direct experiences with their environment guide
them in an effective direction. Your job is to have them contact these
contingencies without verbal interference.
4. Use examples and metaphors relevant to your client. Resist the urge to
overexplain metaphors.
150
15
APPENDIX B
Session-by-Session ACT Cheat Sheet
Note: This cheat sheet is more helpful if you have already read the chapters in
the book. These session guides are more like cues on a slideshow to help you re-
member key points to cover in sessions. They do not include details on what each
point means.
Session 1
1. Establish treatment goals.
2. Provide orientation to therapy and ACT.
3. Illustrate creative hopelessness. Metaphor: Two games
4. Assign homework: Practice willingness.
Session 2
1. Review homework.
2. Address control as the problem.
a. Workability of emotional/cognitive control. Exercises: Don’t feel
anxiety, don’t think of . . ., create an emotion, control overt behavior
b. Workability of behavioral control.
3. Validate need or desire for control.
4. Introduce acceptance as an alternative.
5. Frame weekly homework as behavioral commitments.
6. Assign homework using Behavioral Commitment Worksheet (Appendix C).
See the end of this appendix for notes on homework setting and review.
Sessions 3 and 4
1. Review homework.
2. Review acceptance. Analogy: School teacher
3. Discuss automaticity of thoughts and fusion.
4. Introduce defusion. Exercises: Describing versus evaluating experiences,
labeling-thoughts mindfulness exercise, breaking the rules
5. Assign homework using Behavioral Commitment Worksheet
(Appendix C).
152
152 Appendix B
Sessions 5 and 6
1. Review homework.
2. Introduce values to enhance motivation.
3. Review acceptance. Exercises: Self-compassion, flexible attention with a
painful emotion, changing “but” into “and”
4. Review defusion. Exercises: Seeing thoughts more concretely
5. Introduce mindfulness. Exercise: Putting thoughts on movie screen
Sessions 7 and 8
1. Start with mindfulness exercise. Exercises: Notice the breath, notice bodily
sensations, notice sounds in the room, notice thoughts, notice feelings or
urges, take perspective on the past, take perspective on the future, notice
observing perspective, notice intentions (values).
2. Review homework.
3. Review acceptance and defusion as needed. Exercises: Annoying younger
sibling, NOTE acronym (handout in Appendix E).
4. Introduce self-as-context. Exercises: You as a home
5. Assign homework using the Behavioral Commitment Worksheet
(Appendix C).
Session 9
1. Review homework.
2. Define and clarify values. Use Valued Living Questionnaire (VLQ;
Appendix F) or Bull’s-Eye Values Survey (Appendix G).
3. Assess consistency between actions and values.
4. Brainstorm goals based on values.
5. Assign homework using the Behavioral Commitment Worksheet
(Appendix C).
Session 10
1. Review homework.
2. Review values.
3. Define behavioral commitments and emphasize sustainability of actions.
Analogy: Graph with overall increasing trend
Session 11
1. Review homework.
2. Ask about useful aspects of therapy.
3. Ask about areas that client will struggle with going forward.
4. Encourage moving in a valued direction and brainstorm ways to stay
on track.
5. Provide resources (see Self-Guided ACT Resources in Appendix H).
Include yourself as an option.
6. Say goodbye.
153
Appendix B153
HOMEWORK DISCUSSION
When setting homework (i.e., behavioral commitments), choose behaviors that are:
1. Concrete (such that an observer could tell whether it occurred).

2. 90% doable given your client’s skill level.
3. Sufficiently challenging to your client.
4. Linked to values.
5. About practicing a specific process of change.
When reviewing homework, cover the following points:

1. Did your client complete the homework?
2. What was your client’s experience of engaging in valued action (during
and after)?
3. What were challenges or barriers they faced?
4. What did they do with or how did they respond to those challenges?
154
15
APPENDIX C
Behavioral Commitment Worksheet
What I am committing to do this week:
• Be specific by writing out exactly what you will do, when, and for how long, so that if
someone watched you, they would know if you met this commitment or not.
• Remember this is about building patterns one small step at a time. Pick a small goal
that you can realistically achieve.
This commitment is important to me because:
While I work on my commitment I will practice:
Practical, external barriers that might get in the way and how I will address them:
• Consider barriers external to you that might make it hard to meet this
commitment (time, money, opportunity, what others do). How can you
address/prepare for these ahead of time?
• If external factors prevent you from being able to work on your commitment, what
could you do instead that would have a similar meaning and importance to you?
I will do the following ahead of time to help meet my commitment:
• Consider reminders you can set (on your phone, sticky notes, etc…)
• Consider ways to make it easier to achieve or get support for your
commitment (have what you need set up ahead of time, let supportive
friends/family know what you are committing to, etc…)
156
157
APPENDIX D
List of Mindfulness Apps
• Headspace (subscription on iOS/Android; https://www.headspace.

com/). This is the most widely used commercial mindfulness
mobile app available. It includes a wide range of tools to learn
about and practice mindfulness.
• Liberate Meditation (free on iOS/Android; https://liberatemeditation.
com). This app is designed for ethnic minority individuals and includes
Dharma talks (25–30 minutes) and guided meditations (5–20 minutes)
by Buddhist teachers from marginalized ethnic groups.
• Mindfulness Coach (free on iOS/Android; https://mobile.va.gov/
app/mindfulness-coach). This app was developed by the Veterans
Administration (VA) and provides a range of free mindfulness
meditations.
• Stop, Breathe & Think (subscription on iOS/Android with some free
exercises; https://www.stopbreathethink.com/). This app includes a
number of free mindfulness exercises, with suggestions on what to
practice based on a quick check-in assessment. A more extended set of
mindfulness exercises can be purchased with a subscription.
158
159
APPENDIX E
NOTE Handout
N Notice what is happening.

What thoughts and feelings are showing up? How are you responding to
those thoughts and feelings?
O Observe your thoughts and feelings for what they are.

Take a step back from your thoughts and feelings and simply watch
them with curiosity. Make room for them without getting caught up in
their content.
T Turn toward your values.

What would be important for you to do in this very moment? What
value would you like to enact in this space? What would move you
closer to the life you want for yourself or the person you want to be?
E Engage in what matters.

Choose to act, based on your values. Recognize you are 100% in control
of your behaviors. You get to decide what you do next.
160
16
APPENDIX F
Valued Living Questionnaire (VLQ)
The following are domains of life that are valued by some people. We are con-
cerned with your subjective experience of your quality of life in each of these
domains. One aspect of quality of life involves the importance one places on the
different domains of living. Rate the importance of each domain (by circling a
number) on a scale of 1 to 10; 1 means that domain is not at all important, and
10 means that domain is very important. Not everyone will value all of these
domains, or value all domains the same. Rate each domain according to your own
personal sense of importance.
162
162 Appendix F
DURING THE PAST WEEK
Domain
important
important
Extremely
1. Family relations Not at all
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(other than mar-
riage or parenting)
2. Marriage/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Couples/Intimate
relations
3. Parenting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4. Friendships/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Social relations
5. Employment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6. Education/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Training
7. Recreation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8. Spirituality 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
9. Citizenship/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Community life
10. Physical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
well-being
In this section, we would like you to give a rating of how consistent your actions
are with each value. Everyone does better in some domains than others. We are
NOT asking about your ideal in each domain. We want to know how you think you
have been doing during the past week. Rate each item (by circling a number) on a
scale of 1 to 10; 1 means that your actions have been fully inconsistent with your
value, and 10 means that your actions have been fully consistent with your value.
163
Appendix F163
Domain
important
important
Extremely
Not at all
1. Family relations 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(other than mar-
riage or parenting)
2. Marriage/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Couples/Intimate
relations
3. Parenting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4. Friendships/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Social relations
5. Employment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6. Education/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Training
7. Recreation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8. Spirituality 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
9. Citizenship/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Community life
10. Physical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
well-being
Wilson, K. G., Sandoz, E. K., Kitchens, J., & Roberts, M. (2010). The Valued Living
Questionnaire: Defining and measuring valued action within a behavioral frame-
work. The Psychological Record, 60, 249–272.
164
165
APPENDIX G
Bull’s-Eye Values Survey (BEVS)

16
166 Appendix G
BULLSEYE
The bullseye dartboard is divided into four areas of living that are important
in people’s lives: work/education, leisure, relationships, and personal growth/
health.
1) Work/Education refers to your career aims, your values about

improving your education and knowledge, and generally feeling of
use to those close to you or to your community (i.e., volunteering,
overseeing your household, etc.).
2) Leisure refers to how you play in your life and how you enjoy
yourself, your hobbies, or other activities that you spend your free
time doing (e.g., gardening, sewing, coaching a children’s soccer
team, fishing, playing sports).
3) Relationships refers to intimacy in your life and relationships with
your children, your family of origin, your friends, and social contacts
in the community.
4) Personal growth/health refers to your spiritual life, either in organized
religion or personal expressions of spirituality, exercise, nutrition,
and addressing health risk factors such as drinking, drug use,
smoking, and weight.
In this exercise, you will be asked to look more closely at your personal values in
each of these areas and write them out. Then, you will evaluate how close you are
to living your life in keeping with your values. You will also take a closer look at
the barriers or obstacles in your life that stand between you and the kind of life
you want to live. Don’t rush through this; just take your time.
PAR T 1. IDENTIFY YOUR VALUES
Start by describing your values within each of the four values areas. Think about
each area in terms of your dreams, like you have the possibility to get your
wishes completely fulfilled. What are the qualities that you would like to get out
of each area, and what are your expectations from these areas of your life? Your
value should not be a specific goal but instead reflect a way you would like to
live your life over time. For example, getting married might be a goal you have
in life, but it just reflects your value of being an affectionate, honest, and loving
partner. To accompany your son to a baseball game might be a goal; to be an in-
volved and interested parent might be the value. Note: Write your value for each
area on the lines provided next. It is your personal values that are important in
this exercise.
167
Appendix G167
Work/education: ________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
Leisure: _______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
Relationships: __________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
Personal growth/health: ___________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
Now, look again at the values you have written above. Think of your value as
“bullseye” (the middle of the dart board). Bullseye is exactly how you want
your life to be—a direct hit, where you are living your life in a way that is con-
sistent with your value. Now, make an X on the dart board in each area that best
represents where you stand today. An X in the bullseye means that you are living
completely in keeping with your value for that area of living. An X far away from
the bullseye means that your life is way off the mark in terms of how you are
living your life.
Since there are four areas of valued living, you should mark four X’s on the dart
board. Note: Use the dart board on this page before you go to Part 2 of this exercise.
My life is just as I My life is far from

want it to be how I want it to be
Work/ Leisure
Education
Personal growth/ Relation-

Health ships
168
168 Appendix G
PAR T 2: IDENTIFY YOUR OBSTACLES
Now write down what stands between you and living your current life as you
want to and what you have written in your areas of value. When you think of the
life you want to live and the values that you would like to put in play, what gets in
the way of you living that kind of life? Describe any obstacle(s) on the lines that
follow.
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Now estimate to what extent the obstacle(s) you just described can prevent you
from living your life in a way that is in keeping with your values. Circle one
number that best describes how powerful this obstacle(s) is in your life.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Doesn’t prevent me at all Prevents me completely
PAR T 3. MY VALUED ACTION PLAN
Think about actions you can take in your daily life that would tell you that you
are zeroing in on the bullseye in each important area of your life. These actions
could be small steps toward a particular goal, or they could just be actions that re-
flect what you want to be about as a person. Usually, taking a valued step includes
being willing to encounter the obstacle(s) you identified earlier and to take the
action anyway. Try to identify at least one value-based action you are willing to
take, in each of the four areas listed here.
Work/education: ________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
Leisure: _______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
Relationships: __________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
Personal growth/health: ___________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
169
APPENDIX H
Self-Guided ACT Resources
The following is a collection of self-guided resources you can use to continue to

learn about and apply ACT in your life. We included books, mobile apps, and on-
line resources that are designed for people like yourself who are looking to apply
ACT in their lives.
ACT BOOKS
The following are a set of ACT books we especially recommend for targeted areas.
These books typically start from the beginning by walking you through the ACT
approach, which we find can be a useful review and reminder for what you have
learned in therapy. There are many ways to practice ACT, so this will also help you
find new ways to apply ACT in your life.
• Depression: Strosahl, K. D., & Robinson, P. J. (2017). The Mindfulness

and Acceptance Workbook for Depression: Using Acceptance and
Commitment Therapy to Move Through Depression and Create a Life
Worth Living. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications.
• Anxiety: Forsyth, J. P., & Eifert, G. H. (2016). The Mindfulness and
Acceptance Workbook for Anxiety: A Guide to Breaking Free from Anxiety,
Phobias, and Worry Using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy.
Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications.
• Social anxiety: Fleming, J. E., & Kocovski, N. L. (2013). The Mindfulness
and Acceptance Workbook for Social Anxiety and Shyness: Using
Acceptance and Commitment Therapy to Free Yourself from Fear and
Reclaim Your Life. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications.
• Trauma: Follette, V., & Pistorello, J. (2007). Finding Life beyond
Trauma: Using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy to Heal from Post-
Traumatic Stress and Trauma-Related Problems. Oakland, CA: New
Harbinger Publications.
170
170 Appendix H
• Substance use problems: Wilson, K. G., & DuFrene, T. (2012). The

Wisdom to Know the Difference: An Acceptance and Commitment Therapy
Workbook for Overcoming Substance Abuse. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger
Publications.
• Weight concerns: Lillis, J., Dahl, J., & Weineland, S. M. (2014). The
Diet Trap: Feed Your Psychological Needs and End the Weight Loss
Struggle Using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy. Oakland, CA: New
• ACT for teenagers: Ciarrochi, J. V., Hayes, L. L., & Bailey, A. (2012).
Get Out of Your Mind and Into Your Life for Teens: A Guide to Living an
Extraordinary Life. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications.
• General ACT book written by the primary developer of ACT, Steven
C. Hayes: Hayes, S. C. (2005). Get Out of Your Mind and Into Your
Life: The New Acceptance and Commitment Therapy. Oakland, CA: New
• Mindfulness: Stahl, B., & Goldstein, E. (2010). A Mindfulness-Based
Stress Reduction Workbook. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications.
You can also visit https://www.newharbinger.com/psychsolve for help finding a

self-help book or https://contextualscience.org/amazon_self_help_bookstore for
a full list of ACT books.
ACT MOBILE APPS
Presented here are ACT and related mobile apps that can help you continue to
practice what you have learned in therapy through your smartphone. This list was
created in 2019, but you can review a continually updated list of mental health
mobile apps at PsyberGuide (https://psyberguide.org/).
• ACT Coach (free on iOS/Android; https://mobile.va.gov/app/act-

coach): This app was developed by the Veterans Administration (VA) and
includes a variety of tools to help you practice ACT.
• ACT Companion ($3–$15 on iOS/Android; http://www.actcompanion.
com/): This app was developed by Russ Harris (a leading ACT trainer)
and provides a variety of tools to practice ACT.
• ACTive: Value-Based Living (free on iOS only; https://itunes.apple.com/
us/app/active-value-based-living/id1343994479): This app provides tools
to monitor and set values-based goals.
• Mindfulness apps: There are a variety of mindfulness apps available, but
here are a couple we especially recommend:
• Headspace (subscription on iOS/Android; https://www.headspace.
com/)
17
Appendix H171
• Stop, Breathe & Think (subscription on iOS/Android: https://www.

stopbreathethink.com/)
• Mindfulness Coach (free on iOS/Android; https://mobile.va.gov/app/
mindfulness-coach)
ONLINE ACT RESOURCES
The following are a few key ACT websites and online resources we recommend:
• ACT Guide (https://scce.usu.edu/services/act-guide/): This is a self-

guided course we developed at Utah State University. For a small
fee, users can go through the 12-session program, learning key ACT
principles and how to apply them in their life.
• The Happiness Trap Online (https://thehappinesstrap.com/8-week-
program/): This is another self-guided course you can subscribe to that is
designed to teach key ACT principles.
• ACT for the Public Website (https://contextualscience.org/act_for_the_
public): This website is maintained by the Association for Contextual
Behavioral Science, the professional home of ACT. It includes a variety of
resources for people like yourself looking to apply ACT in their lives.
• ACT for the Public Listserv (https://contextualscience.org/emailing_
lists#ACTPUBLIC): This is a long-standing email listserv in which people
share about their experiences applying ACT in their lives and get help
from others doing the same.
• ACT Facebook Group (https://www.facebook.com/groups/ACTsupport/):
This is a Facebook group designed for people to support each other in
applying ACT in their lives.
172
173
ABOUT THE AUTHORS
Michael P. Twohig, PhD, is a licensed psychologist in the state of Utah and a

Professor of Psychology at Utah State University. He received his BA and MS from
the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, his PhD from the University of Nevada,
Reno, and completed his clinical internship at the University of British Columbia
Hospital. He is past-President of the Association of Contextual Behavioral
Science, the organization most associated with Acceptance and Commitment
Therapy (ACT). His research focuses on the use of ACT across a variety of clinical
presentations with an emphasis on obsessive compulsive and related disorders. He
has published over 100 peer-reviewed articles and three books: An ACT-Enhanced
Behavior Therapy Approach to the Treatment of Trichotillomania (with Woods), ACT
Verbatim for Depression and Anxiety (with Hayes), and Innovations in Acceptance
and Commitment Therapy (with Levin and Krafft). His research has been funded
through multiple sources including the National Institute of Mental Health.
Michael E. Levin, PhD, is an Associate Professor of Psychology at Utah State

University and a licensed psychologist in the state of Utah. He received his PhD
in Clinical Psychology from the University of Nevada, Reno, under the men-
torship of Dr. Steven C. Hayes and completed his predoctoral internship at the
Brown University Clinical Psychology Training Consortium. Dr. Levin’s research
focuses on online and self-guided Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)
interventions to improve the reach and impact of mental health services, which
has been supported by funding sources including the National Institute of Health.
He has published over 100 articles and book chapters, primarily on ACT. Dr. Levin
has published two previous books: Innovations in Acceptance and Commitment
Therapy (with Twohig and Krafft) and Mindfulness and Acceptance for Addictive
Behaviors (with Hayes).
Clarissa W. Ong, MS, is a fifth-year doctoral student in the Combined Clinical/

Counseling Psychology program at Utah State University. She received her BA
from Smith College. Her research interests include developing and testing process-
based interventions for anxiety and obsessive-compulsive-related concerns and
psychometric evaluation of clinical measures.
174
175
INDEX
Figures and tables are indicated by f and t following the page number.
ACBS (Association for Contextual applicability of

Behavioral Science), viii to clients, 2
acceptance, 11–12, 69–73, 94–98 to practitioners, 2–3
ACT ADVISOR for measuring, 27f to settings, 3
as alternative to control, 69–73 apps for, 170–171
assessment questions, 23 behavior analysis as foundation
as a choice, 72–73 for, 7–10
defined, 11–12, 69, 82–83 challenge of implementation, vii–viii,
discussing situations where client 16, 33–34
struggles with, 96–97, 111–112 cognitive-behavioral therapies as
exercises for practicing, 98–99 foundation for
annoying younger sibling, 113 ACT compared to CBT, 2–4
changing but into and, 99 as part of CBT tradition, 3–4
flexible attention with a painful control as problem, 61–76
emotion, 98–99 alternatives to control, 56–58, 69–73
self-compassion, 98 effectiveness of, 62–64
experiential avoidance as inverse of, 11 exercises to illustrate difficulty of
hexaflex graphic, 15, 15f control, 64–66
homework involving, 106–107, 111 motivational description for
letting thoughts be, 69–71, 81 client, 73–74
liking vs. allowing, 71–72 reasons for focus on control, 67–69
prompting with metaphors, 98–99 creative hopelessness, 52–56
supported by defusion, 77–92 determining effectiveness of client’s
labeling-thoughts mindfulness efforts, 54–56
exercise, 88–89 determining how long client has
mind as helpful and hurtful, 84–86 struggled, 53
objective vs. subjective evaluations, 87 determining what client has done to
rule-breaking exercise, 89–90 control experience, 54, 54t
school teacher analogy, 83 finding target inner experience, 52–53
utility of defusion, 84–85 goal of, 52
Acceptance and Action Questionnaires origin of term, 52
AAQ-II, 22, 22f, 28 defined, viii
list of, 24t–26t ending therapy, 145–147
measuring six processes of psychological evidence base of, 1–2
flexibility, 27f following manuals, vii–ix
Acceptance and Commitment Therapy functional contextualism as foundation
(ACT), 74–75. See also processes of for, 4–6
change; sample sessions behavior-in context, 5
176
176 Index
Acceptance and Commitment resisting urge to explain

Therapy (cont.) metaphors, 38–39
evaluating success through working teaching experientially, 36–38, 149
toward goals, 6 training gap, vii–viii, 33
predicting and influencing ACT ADVISOR, 23, 27f, 28, 77, 107, 111,
behavior, 5–6 118–119, 135, 141
function over form, 3, 16, 41 anxiety, 1–2, 13, 48–49
general parameters for treatment, 4 acceptance vs. tolerance, 69
orienting client to, 47–52 ACT compared to CBT, 4
clarifying that improvement will not alternatives to controlling inner
be linear, 51 experiences, 56–57
determining client’s understanding of creative hopelessness, 52
therapy, 48–49 describing as transitory vs. stable, 45
determining what client wants to be determining effectiveness of client’s
different, 47–48 efforts, 55
discussing what a “good” outcome determining primary clinical
is, 49–51 concern, 20
giving therapy time to prove its determining what client has done to
utility, 51–52 control experience, 54
person-centered nature of, 19 disclosure, 42–44
problems for which ACT is effective, discussing values early in
vii, 1–2 therapy, 94–96
as process-based intervention, 41–42 exercise to illustrate difficulty of
psychological flexibility model, 14–16 controlling, 64
case conceptualization and exposure exercises, 137
practice, 15–16 finding target for therapy, 53
function over form, 16 metaphors, 38, 57–58
hexaflex graphic, 15, 15f moving in valued directions, 143–144
psychological inflexibility objective vs. subjective
model, 10–11 evaluations, 45, 87
cognitive fusion, 10 questions to ask regarding processes of
experiential avoidance, 10 change, 23, 27
relational frame theory as foundation self-conceptualizations and, 114–115
for, 7–10 teaching experientially, 37
self-guided resources, 169–171 assessment, 19–29
in therapeutic context, 33–46, 149 for contextual, historical, or cultural
acknowledging it is OK to have all variables, 28
sorts of inner experiences, 34 to determine functional
disclosure, 42–44, 149 context maintaining target
language conventions, 44–45 behaviors, 21–28
letting clients’ experiences guide their Acceptance and Action
choices, 41, 149 Questionnaires, 22f, 24t–26t
meaningful examples and metaphors, elements of psychological
39–41, 149 inflexibility, 21–22
modeling psychological flexibility, role of psychological inflexibility, 21
35–36, 42, 149 to determine primary clinical
pattern for average session, 37–38 concerns, 20–21
17
Index177
collaboratively developed clinical general parameters for treatment, 4

targets and goals, 20 as part of CBT tradition, 3–4
value of targeting one clinical cognitive defusion. See defusion
issue, 20–21 cognitive fusion, 10
setting up ongoing assessment program committed actions. See behavioral
for treatment, 29 commitment
compulsions, 1–2, 29
behavioral commitment (committed context. See also self-as-context
actions), 13–14, 91–93 acceptance and, 12
ACT ADVISOR for measuring, 27f cognitive defusion, 11
assessment questions, 27 functional contextualism, 4–6
behaving in accordance with goals and control
values, 129 alternatives to, 56–58, 69–73
cognitive defusion, 89–90 control as problem, 61–76
connecting with values, 137 creative hopelessness, 54, 54t
hexaflex graphic, 15, 15f effectiveness of, 62–64
homework involving, 73–75, 78–79, exercises to illustrate difficulty of, 64–66
106–107, 111, 117–119, 130, 133– controlling emotions, 64
134, 139–141 controlling overt behavior, 65–66
rule-breaking exercise, 89–90 controlling thoughts, 64–65
taking small steps, 138–139 creating emotions, 65
unpredictable outcomes of, 134–135 idea that life will be better once inner
viewing like a graph, 138 experiences are controlled, 47–48
as way of life, 139 reasons for focus on, 67–69
Behavioral Commitment Worksheet, 92, situations where control does
106, 118, 130, 139, 155 work, 68–69
behavior analysis, 7–10 sources of influence, 67–68
relation to CBT, 7 spending time on meaningful things
relational frame theory, 7–10 rather than controlling inner
being present, 12–13, 58, 71, 137, 139 experiences, 94–96
ACT ADVISOR for measuring, 27f creative hopelessness, 52–56
assessment questions, 23 determining effectiveness of client’s
defined, 12 efforts, 54–56
hexaflex graphic, 15, 15f long-term effectiveness, 55
mindfulness and, 88, 103, 109–110 short-term effectiveness, 55
psychological flexibility, 42, 73 determining how long client has
body image issues, 2, 82 struggled, 53
booster sessions, 144–145 determining what client has done to
Bull’s-Eye Values Survey (BEVS), 125–127, control experience, 54, 54t
165–168 finding target inner experience, 52–53
goal of, 52
chronic pain, vii, 2, 45 origin of term, 52
cognitive-behavioral therapies (CBTs), 33 cultural variables, assessment for, 28
ACT compared to, 2–4
conceptualizing and addressing inner defusion (cognitive defusion), 11, 33,
experiences, 4 73, 78–79
fidelity to protocols, 4 ACT ADVISOR for measuring, 27f
178
178 Index
defusion (cognitive defusion) (cont.) exercises

assessment questions, 23 to illustrate difficulty of control, 64–66
creating from social rules, 121–122 controlling emotions, 64
discussing situations where client controlling overt behavior, 65–66
struggles with, 100–101, 111–112 controlling thoughts, 64–65
exercises for practicing creating emotions, 65
annoying younger sibling, 113 for practicing acceptance, 98–99
labeling-thoughts mindfulness annoying younger sibling, 113
exercise, 88–89 changing but into and, 99
objective vs. subjective evaluations, 87 flexible attention with a painful
rule-breaking exercise, 89–90 emotion, 98–99
using objects to see thoughts more self-compassion, 98
concretely, 101–103 for practicing defusion
hexaflex graphic, 15, 15f annoying younger sibling, 113
homework involving, 91–93 labeling-thoughts mindfulness
link with acceptance, 77–92 exercise, 88–89
labeling-thoughts mindfulness objective vs. subjective evaluations, 87
exercise, 88–89 rule-breaking exercise, 89–90
mind as helpful and hurtful, 84–86 using objects to see thoughts more
objective vs. subjective concretely, 101–103
evaluations, 87 for practicing mindfulness
relationship between acceptance and acknowledging, 98
defusion, 84–85 breathing, 98, 110
rule-breaking exercise, 89–90 listening to emotions, 99
school teacher analogy, 83 noticing feelings or urges, 110
utility of defusion, 84–85 noticing self-as-context, 110–111
utility of, 84–85 noticing sounds, 110
depression, vii, 1–2, 49–50 noticing thoughts, 110
acceptance, 71, 81 noticing values, 111
creative hopelessness, 52 observing physical sensations, 98, 110
describing as transitory vs. stable, 45 observing vs. buying into thoughts,
describing objectively vs. subjectively, 45 104–106
disclosure, 37 opening sessions with exercises,
identifying primary clinical concern, 20 109–111
moving in valued directions, 143 prompting acceptance with
predicting and influencing behavior, 6 metaphors, 98–99
working experientially, 37 taking perspective on the past/
disclosure, 42–44 future, 110
appropriate boldness, 43–44 watching how emotion changes, 98
difficulty in implementation, 42–43 for practicing self-as-context, thoughts
examples of, 43–44 do not define you, 116–117
experiential avoidance, 54, 99, 114
eating disorders, 1, 12, 94 acceptance as inverse of, 11
educational variables, assessment for, 28 avoidance cycle, 2
emotions. See inner experiences defined, 10
empirically supported treatment experiential teaching, 36–38, 79–80, 149
(EST), 1–2 exposure exercises, 137
179
Index179
familial variables, assessment for, 28 inner experiences

fear, 4, 34, 50, 63, 66, 69, 81–82, 84–85, 90, 134 acceptance as place where all inner
changes in functions, 9 experiences can exist, 69, 81
finding target for therapy, 53 ACT compared to CBT, 4
of letting thoughts be, 81 alternatives to controlling, 56–58
panic attacks, 29, 41, 45 clients’ lack of experience with
of rejection, 92 accepting, 81
feelings. See inner experiences cognitive defusion and, 84–86
flexible attention. See mindfulness contributing to values-actions
flexible sense of self. See self-as-context discrepancy, 128
functional contextualism, 4–6 deciding which to listen to, 90–91
behavior-in context, 5 describing as transitory vs.
evaluating success through working stable, 45
toward goals, 6 describing objectively vs. subjectively, 45
predicting and influencing behavior, 5–6 determining what client has done to
control, 54, 54t
gender identity and sexual orientation, finding target for therapy, 52–53
assessment for, 28 idea that certain inner experiences are
goals bad, 49–50
behaving in accordance with values idea that inner experiences can be easily
and, 129 changed, 51
choosing goals consistent with values, modeling that it is OK to have, 35–36
128–129 as not defining you, 116–117
collaboratively-developed, 4, 20 school teacher analogy, 83
determining what client wants from spending time on meaningful things
therapy, 47–48 rather than controlling, 94–96
evaluating success through working understanding client’s relationship
toward, 6 with, 59, 61–62, 78
quality of life as, 49 viewing difficult actions as
values vs., 123 meaningful, 136
graphing outcome data and psychological working with rather than
flexibility scores, 29 discussing, 36
Hayes, Steven, viii, 7, 27 maladaptive processes, 2, 7, 9, 13

hexaflex graphic, 15, 15f, 41 medication compliance/adherence, 2
historical variables, assessment for, 28 meta-analyses of ACT, 2
homework metaphors, 37–38
acceptance, 106–107, 111 meaningful, 39–41, 149
behavioral commitment, 73–75, prompting acceptance with, 98–99
78–79, 106–107, 111, 117–119, resisting urge to explain, 38–39
130, 133–134, 139–141 school teacher analogy, 83
defusion, 91–93 two-games metaphor, 57–59
mindfulness, 111 mindfulness (flexible attention), 13,
reviewing, 153 103–106
self-as-context, 117–119 apps for, 111, 157
setting, 153 choosing what to pay attention to based
values, 130, 133–134 on values, 103–104
180
180 Index
mindfulness (flexible attention) (cont.) being present, 12, 15, 15f, 23, 27f
exercises for practicing cognitive defusion, 11, 15, 15f, 23, 27f,
acknowledging, 98 33, 77–91
breathing, 98, 110 flexible sense of self, 12–13, 15f, 23,
labeling thoughts, 88–89 27f, 114–119
listening to emotions, 99 working on, 27–28
noticing feelings or urges, 110 simplifying into two sets of
noticing self-as-context, 110–111 components, 27–28
noticing sounds, 110 values and behavioral commitment
noticing thoughts, 110 components, 13–15
noticing values, 111 committed action, 13–15, 15f, 27,
observing physical sensations, 98, 110 27f, 91–93
observing vs. buying into thoughts, values, 13–15, 15f, 23, 27f, 119–130,
104–106 142–144
opening sessions with exercises, working on, 27–28
109–111 psychological flexibility model, 73
prompting acceptance with graphing scores, 29
metaphors, 98–99 inner experiences contributing to
taking perspective on the past/ values-actions discrepancy, 128
future, 110 in therapeutic context
watching how emotion changes, 98 creating experiences that teach, 36
hexaflex graphic, 15f disclosure, 42–44
homework involving, 111 importance of modeling, 42
practicing with a painful emotion, 98–99 teaching experientially, 37–38
modeling psychological inflexibility model, 10–11
acceptance, 35–36 assessing role of, 21, 24t–26t
avoiding having notes during session, 44 being present vs., 12
ending therapy, 145–147 cognitive fusion, 10
prediction and influence, 6 experiential avoidance, 10
psychological flexibility, 42–44, 112, 149 identifying elements of, 21–23,
motivational description, 73–74 27–28, 27f
predicting where client will get stuck in
NOTE acronym, 113–114, 159 future, 142
psychosis, 1–2
obsessions, 45, 53, 71 PTSD (posttraumatic stress disorder), vii
obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD),
1–2, 36, 72 quality of life
overt behavior, exercise to control, 65–66 creative hopelessness, 52–53
gains measured in terms of, 48, 51
panic attacks, 29, 41, 45 as goal, 49
posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD), vii two-games metaphor, 57
processes of change, viii, 11–15. See also
names of specific processes of change randomized control trials (RCTs), 2–3
acceptance and mindfulness relational frame theory (RFT), 7–10
components, 11–13 features of, 7–10
acceptance, 11–12, 15, 15f, 23, 27f, changes in functions, 9
69–73, 77–91, 94–98 coherence as reinforcer, 8–9
18
Index181
contextually-controlled nature of deciding which inner experiences to

relations and changes, 9–10 listen to, 90–91
deriving new relations, 8 defined, 82–83
origin of, 7 greeting clients, 77–78
values, 14 homework, 91–92
religion and spirituality, assessment for, 28 labeling-thoughts mindfulness
rules exercise, 88–89
challenging, 49 mind as helpful and hurtful, 84–86
client’s understanding of therapy, 48 objective vs. subjective evaluations, 87
creating defusion from social rules, relationship between acceptance and
121–122 defusion, 84–85
experiences vs., 36–37 reviewing homework, 78–79
holding flexibly, 48–49 rule-breaking exercise, 89–90
letting client figure ACT out on their school teacher analogy, 83
own, 41 teaching experientially, 79–80
metaphors vs., 39–41 trying acceptance again, 81–82
rule-breaking exercise, 89–90 utility of defusion, 84–85
unworkable and erroneous sessions 5 and 6, 93–107, 152
that certain inner experiences are discussing values, 94–96
bad, 49–50 exercise for practicing defusion,
that gains are gradual and linear, 51 101–103
that inner experiences can be easily exercises for practicing
changed, 51 acceptance, 98–99
that inner experiences need to be homework, 106–107
controlled, 67–69 mindfulness (flexible attention),
that life will be better once inner 103–106
experiences are controlled, 47–48 reviewing acceptance, 94–98
reviewing defusion, 100–101
sample sessions, 109–111 reviewing homework, 93
session 1, 47–59, 151 sessions 7 and 8, 109–118, 152
alternatives to controlling inner assessing struggles, 111–112
experiences, 56–58 discussing self-as-context, 114–116
creative hopelessness, 52–56 exercise for practicing
homework, 59 acceptance, 113
orienting client to ACT, 47–52 exercise for practicing defusion, 113
session 2, 61–76, 151 exercise for practicing self-as-context,
acceptance as alternative to 116–117
control, 69–73 exercises for practicing mindfulness,
effectiveness of control, 62–64 109–111
exercises to illustrate difficulty of homework, 117–118
control, 64–66 NOTE acronym, 113–114
homework, 74–75 reviewing homework, 111
motivational description for session 9, 119–131, 152
client, 73–74 behaving in accordance with goals
reasons for focus on control, 67–69 and values, 129
reviewing homework, 61–62 choosing goals consistent with values,
sessions 3 and 4, 77–92, 151 128–129
182
182 Index
sample sessions (cont.) self-evaluations and self-stories,

choosing how much something is 114–116
valued, 125–126 self-compassion, 98, 106
clarifying values, 119–121 self-critical thoughts, 80, 92
creating defusion from social rules, self-evaluations and self-stories, 114–116
121–122 self-guided resources, 144, 169–171
defining personal values, 124–125 self-labels, 115
defining values as a concept, 122–124 sensations. See inner experiences
determining the consistency of situational exposure, 35
current actions with values, Skinner, B. F., 7
126–128 stigma, 1, 144–145
homework, 130 substance abuse, vii, 1–2, 29, 53–54, 56, 94,
problematic values, 129–130 120, 137, 170
reviewing homework, 119
values as guides, 129 thoughts. See also inner experiences
session 10, 133–140, 152 acceptance of, 69–72
discussing behavioral commitments, deciding which to listen to, 90–91
137–139 exercise to illustrate difficulty of
homework, 139–140 control, 64–65
reactions to values, 133–135 labeling-thoughts mindfulness
reviewing homework, 133–135 exercise, 88–89
viewing difficult actions as mind as helpful and hurtful, 84–86
meaningful, 135–137 objective vs. subjective evaluations, 87
session 11, 141–147, 152 treating all thoughts as just things that
ending therapy, 145–147 pop up, 82–83
leaving door open for booster tolerance, acceptance vs., 69
sessions, 144–145 trauma, 45, 50, 71–72, 81, 169
most useful part of therapy for treatment-as-usual, ACT compared to, 2
client, 142 trichotillomania, 53, 74, 94, 123
moving in valued directions, 142–144 two-games metaphor, 57–59
post-therapy resources, 144 Twohig, Michael P., vii–ix, 33, 35, 70, 82,
predicting where client will get stuck 115, 145
in future, 142
reviewing homework, 141 urges, 37, 53, 59, 61, 110
setting weekly reminders in
calendar, 144 Valued Living Questionnaire (VLQ),
school teacher analogy, 83 124–127, 161–163
self-as-context (flexible sense of self), 12– values, 13–14, 94, 119–130
13, 114–119 ACT ADVISOR for measuring, 27f
ACT ADVISOR for measuring, 27f addressing acceptance and defusion
assessment questions, 23 first, 94
discussing, 114–116 assessment questions, 23
exercise for practicing, 116–117 behaving in accordance with goals
hexaflex graphic, 15f and, 129
homework involving, 117–119 choosing between actions, 120–121
mindfulness and, 110–111 choosing goals consistent with, 128–129
183
Index183
choosing how much something is linking immediate actions to meaningful

valued, 125–126 things, 120
clarifying, 119–121, 135 mindfulness as choosing what to pay
creating defusion from social rules, attention to based on values,
121–122 103–104
defining as a concept, 122–124 moving in valued directions, 142–144
defining personal, 124–125 problematic, 129–130
Bull’s-Eye Values Survey, 125 pursuing values rather than regulating
Valued Living Questionnaire, 124–125 emotion, 139
determining consistency of current VLQ (Valued Living Questionnaire),
actions with, 126–128 124–127, 161–163
discussing early in therapy, 94
goals vs., 123 waitlists, ACT compared to, 2
as guides, 129 weight-related issues, 2, 143, 170
hexaflex graphic, 15, 15f willingness, 71, 76–77. See also acceptance
homework involving, 130, 133–134 wounded warriors, vii, 115
184
185
186
187
18
189
190

(2022) - Michael P. Twohig, Michael E. Levin, Clarissa W. Ong - ACT in Steps - A Transdiagnostic Manual For Learning Acceptance and Commitment Therapy

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(2022) - Michael P. Twohig, Michael E. Levin, Clarissa W. Ong - ACT in Steps - A Transdiagnostic Manual For Learning Acceptance and Commitment Therapy

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

(2022) - Michael P. Twohig, Michael E. Levin, Clarissa W. Ong - ACT in Steps - A Transdiagnostic Manual For Learning Acceptance and Commitment Therapy

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

i

Advance praise for ACT in Steps

“This manual targets a central challenge of ACT—how to move from learning

Published in the United States of America by Oxford University Press

© Oxford University Press 2021

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in

You must not circulate this work in any other form

Library of Congress Cataloging-​in-​Publication Data

1. What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)? 1

Appendix A. General ACT Principles 149

ACT is a therapeutic model that orients to a set of key processes to work

What Is Acceptance and

IS THIS A REASONABLE CHOICE FO R THERAPY?

ACT is an empirically supported treatment (EST)

Broad applicability to clients

ACT is flexible in applying to a wide range of practitioners

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?3

and didactic, and anywhere in between depending on various factors. Therapists

ACT IS PAR T OF THE CBT TRADITION

FUNCTIONAL CONTEXTUALISM AS THE FOUNDATION

ACT is based on a philosophy of science called “functional contextualism” (Hayes,

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?5

Behavior-​in-​context as the unit of analysis

A defining feature of functional contextualism is its focus on understanding be-

Prediction and influence is the goal

Successful working is the goal

This brings in another interesting aspect of functional contextualism, which is

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?7

THE BEHAVIOR ANALYTIC AND COG NITIVE

The ability to derive new relations

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?9

This is all contextually controlled

10 A C T in S teps

that shows up in my head” using techniques like acceptance and mindfulness. We

HOW PEOPLE GET STUCK: THE PSYCHOLOGICAL

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?11

ACCEPTANCE AND MINDFULNESS AS A PATHWAY

12 A C T in S teps

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?13

VALUES AND COMMITTED ACTION AS A PATHWAY

14 A C T in S teps

THIS ALL LEADS TO PSYCHOLOGICAL FLEXIBILITY

Altogether, this combination of acceptance, mindfulness, and values-​ based

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?15

Commitment and Behavior

Contact with the

16 A C T in S teps

APPLYING THE PSYCHOLOGICAL FLEXIBILITY

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?17

Association for Contextual Behavioral Science. (2020). ACT randomized controlled

ACT is a function-​based treatment, which means therapeutic choices depend

FOUR MAIN AREAS OF ASSESSMENT FROM AN

1. Determine the primary clinical concern(s). That is, what is the

20 A C T in S teps

1. Determine the primary clinical concern(s)

This statement probably seems obvious to individuals working from an empir-

2. Determine the functional context maintaining the

22 A C T in S teps

1. My painful experiences and memories make it difficult for me to live a

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?3

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?5

Behavior-in-context as the unit of analysis

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?7

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?9

10 A C T in  S teps

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?11

12 A C T in  S teps

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?13

14 A C T in  S teps

Altogether, this combination of acceptance, mindfulness, and values- based

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?15

16 A C T in  S teps

What Is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT)?17

ACT is a function-based treatment, which means therapeutic choices depend

20 A C T in  S teps

1. Determine the primary clinical concern(s)

2. Determine the functional context maintaining the

22 A C T in  S teps

Table 2.1 List of Context-Specific Psychological Flexibility Measures

Work-Related WAAQ Work Bond, Lloyd, & 7

28 A C T in  S teps

3. Assess for contextual, historical, or cultural variables

4. Set up an ongoing assessment program for treatment

30 A C T in  S teps

32 A C T in  S teps

34 A C T in  S teps

General Guide to the ACT Therapeutic Context35

36 A C T in  S teps

General Guide to the ACT Therapeutic Context37

38 A C T in  S teps

General Guide to the ACT Therapeutic Context39

Fit of example/metaphor is more important than saying

40 A C T in  S teps

General Guide to the ACT Therapeutic Context41

ACT IS A PROCESS-B ASED INTER VENTION

The client’s experiences are right—no arguing

42 A C T in  S teps

General Guide to the ACT Therapeutic Context43

44 A C T in  S teps

General Guide to the ACT Therapeutic Context45

46 A C T in  S teps

1. Ask the client what they want from therapy

48 A C T in  S teps

2. Ask the client about their understanding

ACT Orientation and Creative Hopelessness49

3. Discuss what a “good” outcome is